STUDIES OF CHESS: 
 
 i / 
 
 CONTAINING, 
 
 C A I S S A, 
 
 A POEM, BY SIR W. JONES; 
 
 A SYSTEMATIC 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE GAME; 
 
 AND 
 
 THE WHOLE 
 
 &nal$6i& of &f)t& 
 
 BY 
 
 MR. A. D.^PHILIDOR: 
 
 WITH 
 
 ORIGINAL CRITICAL REMARKS 
 
 AND 
 
 COMPENDIOUS DIAGRAMS. 
 
 " Ludimus Effigiem Belli." 
 
 A NEW EDITION, 
 WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. 
 
 IN TWO VOLUMES. 
 
 VOL. I. 
 
 LONDON.- 
 PRINTED FOR S. BAGSTER IN THE STRAND. 
 
 1814.
 
 R. Watu, Printer, Broxboume.
 
 Stack 
 Anr.ox 
 Cago 
 
 1 W 
 
 Contents of the First Volume* 
 
 r 
 
 Extra Section, contaihihg An Apology' and a 
 Critique ------------------ 
 
 CAISSA, a Poem, by Sir' William Jones - - - - - ] 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS -- -._-.--- 21 
 
 Elementary Institutes -..- 23 
 
 Description of the Pieces ------------ 24 
 
 Their Powers 25 
 
 Promoting a Pawn .--------------- 39 
 
 Check and Checkmate -- 31 
 
 Giving a Stale ---------.-.-..... /. 
 
 General Maxims ......... 35 
 
 S. 1. Directions more definite -----.----- 39 
 S. 31. Cases of single pawns remaining ----- 50 
 S. 32. Particular instance of indecisive superiority 58 
 
 Laws of Chess - Q\ 
 
 Art. IX. Licence for Supernumerary Queens - - 64 
 
 And" See Appendix, vol. ii. p. 342, 371.- - - - 
 
 Progressive Essays .--------.--... 69 
 
 First Essay, shewing several methods of extricating 
 
 the Imprisoned Queen --... 70 
 
 Second Essay, comprehending the Scholar's Mate 115 
 
 A 2 Third
 
 iv CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME. 
 
 Third Essay. Caution requisite in playing 
 the Queen's Pawn, after particular Counter- 
 moves ---------------- Page 129 
 
 Scale of Powers -------- -------- 140 
 
 Fourth Essay. Improper movement of the Knight's, 
 
 Pawo..,..-..- r -. r - 19 ? 
 
 Fifth Essay. The King's Pawn one square, feebly 
 
 played ------ r --------- r -- 197 
 
 Sixth Essay. Similar Example of the King's 
 
 Bishop's Pawn - - - - 199 
 
 Seventh Essay. Defence to the Piano Game - - - 206 
 Eighth Essay- Another Countermove to the same 
 
 Attack ---...-.*---. 210 
 
 Conclusion .--._..._...._ ggQ 
 
 ANALYSIS OF CHESS -------------- 223 
 
 Philidor's own Games First Party - - 225 
 
 ------- Second Party ------ 240 
 
 .........---. Third Party ------- 254 
 
 ..... --- Fourth Party ------ 274 
 
 Observations on the Gambits ----------- 295 
 
 Philidork First Gambit ------------- 300 
 
 ..... Second Gambit ------------ 324 
 
 ----- Tliiid Gambit --.-..-.-.-.- 352 
 
 PREFACE.
 
 . . 
 
 PREFACE, 
 
 -' 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 CHESS Is distinguished from otber games 
 by the unhesitating suffrages of writers on 
 education; by the cultivation of individuals 
 in every illustrious order and honoured pro- 
 fession. Kings have not disdained its laws, 
 nor generals to direct engagements on its field; 
 mathematicians have examined its positions as 
 problems, and calculated the force of specific 
 combinations; divines have exercised contem- 
 plation in its vicissitudes. Teeming, through 
 its varied progress and turns, with excitements 
 to thinking, it is, by an essential tendency, a 
 
 gymnasium of the mind. 
 
 
 
 It is unnecessary to insist on the right of 
 this game to be classed alone, as the distinction 
 with which it is viewed, is a general sentiment. 
 The EDITOR is equally unoriginal on another 
 
 4 3 subject,
 
 Tl PREFACE. 
 
 subject, his own opinion merely coinciding with 
 'the impression on the public mind. Com- 
 petent judges class the work of PHILIDOR 
 with the first in excellence; as a deposit of 
 science and experience; as a compendium 
 of invention and skill. While the: substantial 
 utility of the performance is attested, it must 
 be admitted, that PHILIDOR presented it in a 
 dress capable of improvement. This partly 
 arose from an implicit adoption of terms which 
 he found in the game; and partly from the 
 difficulty of giving his ideas an expression 
 as clear as their conception, when conveying 
 them in a foreign language. 
 
 - 
 
 Hence the EDITOR found it necessary to 
 recompose some, and to retouch almost all the 
 notes of the ANALYSIS. For any degree 
 of obscurity which may remain, or have ac- 
 ceded, he is thus become chargeable. He hopes 
 he has not unsuccessfully endeavoured at clear- 
 ness; and he felt it not an incumbent duty 
 to aim at elegance. 
 
 la
 
 PREFACE, til 
 
 In the notation of the moves, the following 
 are the principal alterations upon which he 
 has ventured. When the first lessons at Chess 
 were given to PHILIDOR, a habit of speaking 
 of a piece, as making two moves at once, in- 
 fected his masters ; and he imbibed it. (t The 
 king's pawn two moves." It would be equally 
 proper to direct a bishop to make, at once, 
 seven moves. For phrases*, which have been 
 repeated till they cease to be strange, in mark- 
 ing the distance to be passed by a pawn, the 
 EDITOR uses the phrases, <e one square"" two 
 squares." 
 
 When two or three captures succeed with- 
 out intermission, he found the word " retake" 
 employed.. But a piece once lost, is recovered 
 by a different process than capture ; and though 
 a player may make reprisals or retaliate, he 
 cannot, by any latitude of accommodation, be 
 
 * " The kind's pawn two steps" is not4ess absurd. 
 
 A 4- said
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 said to retake. As this expression must per- 
 plex a beginner by implying a resemblance 
 in Chess and arms, which, in this respect, 
 does not exist, and cannot be agreeable to the 
 proficient who considers its inaccuracy, it is 
 rescinded in the present publication*, for the. 
 simple word " take." 
 
 The term double check was indiscriminately 
 applied, in the ANALYSIS, to a situation 
 which it precisely marks, and to another situ- 
 ation. Two pieces checking the king from dif- 
 ferent points, and a single piece cJiecking in such 
 an attitude, that a part of the assailing power di- 
 verges on a second piece, are, surely, different 
 relations of the mimic forces. The EDITOR 
 
 * This was said in the first edition: the present is the 
 fourth. I have had the satisfaction to see correct terms 
 partially adopted in a late treatise, with the addition of one 
 which I had not introduced : In directing the increment of 
 a piece, the word " af" is properly exploded as a gallicism, 
 and " to" is substituted, or rather restored, for it is em- 
 ployed in the English edition of Greco, 1656. 
 
 bis
 
 PREFACE. IX 
 
 has introduced the new term divergent check, for 
 the latter situation. 
 
 The high reputation of PHILIDOR has not 
 deterred the EDITOR from critically examining 
 each successive example in the ANALYSIS, whe- 
 ther invented or adopted; and if an inqui- 
 sitorial review has detected circumstances, 
 in the collision of the piece*, which appear 
 to flow from oversight, it is a j ust encomium 
 on that accomplished player, that they are very 
 few*. Aware of the delicacy with which 
 movements dependant on complicate play should 
 be touched, the EDITOR has uniformly retain- 
 ed the usual course assigned by PHILIDOR; 
 with regard to any change of course, merely 
 proposing it in a stricture, or pursuing it in 
 the detached form of a variation. One of 
 
 * Among the Games in the ANALYSIS which Philidor 
 pronounces lost in consequence of some particular radical 
 more, the Editor draws one vol. I. p. 289; and wins 
 three fta'd. p. 343, vol. II. p. 17, and ibid. p. 39. 
 
 these
 
 X PREFACE. 
 
 Ihese revisions rescues CUNNINGHAM from the 
 implication of projecting a stratagem, liable 
 to be turned to the defeat of the assailant; 
 as it is extaat, against that player, in the ob- 
 servations of PHILIDOR. 
 
 ,.? i - : .; luJ *> " 
 
 The EDITOR has also introduced extracts 
 from a compendious critique, by the ANONY- 
 MOUS MODENESE, inserted in the Work of 
 LOLLI*: The best of these appears to affect 
 the principle of the Third Party; and the pro- 
 posed change is submitted to the reader, in 
 its place. On other points, particularly the 
 second and third moves of the Fourth Party. 
 
 the vindication of PHILIDOR is not difficult. 
 
 ' 
 
 The ANALYSIS, as left by our professor, 
 was not accompanied by a compendium of the 
 elements of Chess, though a standard display 
 
 * Osservazioni teorico-pratiche sopra tl Giuoco degU 
 Scacchfj in quarto, Bologna, 1763. p. 365. 
 
 of
 
 PREFACE. X* 
 
 of the constitution of the game is more or 
 less necessary to every person who consults 
 a Chess Book. The INTRODUCTION pre- 
 fixed, proceeds on the supposition, that the 
 reader is an inquirer on every point connected 
 with the board and pieces; any other idea 
 excludes method, and involves rejections which 
 may be attributed to caprice. The separate 
 titles will enable each reader to pass, in masses, 
 those particulars of which he does not want to 
 be informed. 
 
 Of the Games in the INTRODUCTION, 
 three are original, and five are derivations from 
 LOLLI after DAMIANO, from the celebrated 
 player GRECO, and others. The term " Essays" 
 is extended to the whole of these; partly as 
 suiting examples adapted to the progress of a 
 pupil, and partly that the running-titles of 
 the Introduction may not any where be similar 
 to those in the Analysis, which would pro-? 
 duce some confusion in reference. The eight 
 examples embrace points which the ANALYSIS 
 had left untouched, or had not pursued to de- 
 monstration. To
 
 xti 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 To facilitate the study of the Back games, 
 the EDITOR has accompanied his essays, and 
 the games of PHILIDOR, where the movements 
 are retraced any considerable way, with a 
 diagram of the state of the board, to relieve 
 the reader from the necessity of playing up 
 to that point, merely to find the position of 
 the pieces. Thus the more advanced Back- 
 games may be played independently as Situations. 
 NOP can it be objected to situations so pro- 
 duced, that it is impossible they should occur, 
 and that the student cannot be improved by 
 them. The white and black pieces are dis- 
 tinguished by the following symbols : 
 
 Pawn - 
 
 Knight 
 Bishop 
 Rook- 
 
 Qticcn 
 
 King 
 
 'i 
 
 * 
 
 The Scale of Powers is an effort of theory 
 
 to
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 to assist the exact calculator, new in its design 
 and composition. An engaging part of the work 
 remains to be noticed. 
 
 The Poem of Sir WILLIAM JONES is intro- 
 duced as a relief from a serious application 
 to the game, and an elegant embellishment. 
 Among its numerous beauties, the description 
 of the operations of the knight, may be pointed 
 out as eminently happy. The reader of taste, 
 far from disapproving the assignation of twenty 
 pages to this admired effusion, which has every 
 mark of culture but want of ease, will regret 
 that the recreative flight is so soon suspended; 
 and the amateur and polite scholar will hail, 
 with pleasure, such a classical offering to Chess. 
 
 EXTRA
 
 MV 
 
 
 EXTRA SECTION ; 
 
 *7 t>i' " AT j n > 
 
 Including an -apology and a Critique. 
 
 .-T; !;) 
 
 
 SINCE the last Edition of the work in the 
 
 Reader's hand, a treatise has been published, 
 which forces itself on the Writer's particular 
 notice, by animadversions on him as Author 
 
 of the Introduction and Editor of Philidor. 
 
 - 
 
 . 
 .As these animadversions go back, for their 
 
 first subjects, to articles which are to be found 
 neither in this, nor in the third, nor in the 
 second edition of the Introduction, having given 
 place, as soon as the first impression was sold, 
 to incontestable improvements, it becomes ne- 
 cessary to explain what they were. 
 
 Nothing is more Common than objections 
 
 to
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XV 
 
 to the inconsistency of the European names for 
 the pieces. With too much respect for theso 
 objections, the writer, in a pamphlet published 
 in 1799, which was the germ of the Introduction 
 to Chess, proposed to substitute the term " mi- 
 nister" for that of " queen." It will appear 
 from the corresponding Oriental word*, that 
 this was rather a restoration than an innovation. 
 He proceeded to assimilate the game to a 
 theatre of polity by introducing the word 
 " peer" for te rook", and " commoner" instead 
 of <c pawn." The favourable reception of his 
 elementary tract, encouraged him to prefix it 
 to an edition of PHILIDOR in 1801: but not 
 to make the established reputation of another 
 the subservient vehicle of an innovation of his 
 own, he reverted to the current system, and 
 withdrew the substituted names. 
 
 . ;"->. 
 
 Mr- Sarratt, who styles himself in his pub- 
 
 Jfpendix to this Work, vol. ii, p. 362. 
 
 lication,
 
 XVI APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 iication. Professor of Chess, has disturbed the 
 repose of this proposition, deeming it a good 
 subject for coarse irony. It would have been 
 candid to have quoted the words in which it 
 
 had been suggested. 
 
 tl 
 
 As tradition represents Chess to have been 
 invented as an image of war, so were the 
 European names reduced to uniformity, that 
 consideration will claim to govern the revision. 
 But the Writer has concluded, from^xperiment 
 and reflection, that no change is to be wished ; 
 for let the word " queen" be succeeded by 
 " marshal," or " general/' and the mitres 
 give way to any military symbol, the faint 
 vestiges of parallel between the chess-board 
 and the field of tactics, will not be strength- 
 ened : on the contrary, the want of a close re- 
 semblance will be exposed. To have no de- 
 finite archetype, agrees with the metaphysical 
 character of the game. 
 
 Jn the edition of 1799, the Writer had de- 
 liberately
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XV11 
 
 liberately introduced into the first lessons faulty 
 moves, to exercise the learner, and to instil a 
 habit of examining every model, previously to 
 adopting any principle, or maxim, from it. 
 The intentional interspersion of these broad 
 errors, might have a parallel use with the in- 
 stances of false construction inserted in gram- 
 mars. Their existence was intimated in the 
 Preface ; and the pupil was cautioned, in the 
 course of the Notes, to try whether better 
 moves might not be adopted. Although some 
 public critics had pronounced their appro- 
 bation of the elementary tract, without ex- 
 cepting to these, yet the Writer, on the demand 
 for a second edition, of his own impulse, dis- 
 continued these, and substituted moves of a 
 higher order. 
 
 Mr. Sarratt has fastened on one of these 
 palpable errors, which it was properly the part 
 of the uninstructed pupil to detect; and with- 
 out any notice of the evident design in its con- 
 struction, has quoted it in his Preface, as a 
 
 VOL. i. b ground
 
 XViii APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 ground for liberal sarcasms on the Writer's 
 skill. 
 
 The same spirit has led Mr. Sarratt to blazon 
 a subject for misrepresentation of a different 
 kind ; an error which was not intended, an ab- 
 solute inadvertence. This solitary defect re- 
 warded the Professor's assiduous and sanguine 
 examination of the last edition. 
 
 A reference to vol. i. p. 124, of the present work 
 will explain what the oversight was, although 
 it has been removed. The Variation on the 
 Writer's second Essay proceeds, for five moves, 
 nearly as the Back game to Philidor's Fifth 
 Regular Party, vol. ii. p. 100, excepting that 
 the Black moves first. In the Variation, the 
 White's defence, at the fifth step, is by the 
 king's knight; in the Back game, a similar 
 attack is met, by playing the king's knight's 
 pawn, at the sixth move. In comparing both 
 methods, the Writer inadvertently let Philidor's 
 move, which prevents the black queen from 
 
 acting
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XlX 
 
 acting 1 on the bishop's second square, also stand. 
 The result was an absurdity both in the sixth 
 move of the White, and the seventh move of 
 the Black, obvious to any person who played 
 the example from the beginning. 
 
 Mr. Sarratt's unusual critical freedom has 
 given the Author of the Introduction a right 
 to examine the plan and execution of the Pro- 
 fessor's Treatise. 
 
 The Professor undertakes to exhibit the pro- 
 per mode of Attack in the first volume, with- 
 out pursuing the proper Defence; and he de- 
 votes the second volume to examples of suc- 
 cessful Defence, chiefly against misconducted 
 Attacks. Any plan is essentially defective which 
 does not embrace games, distinguished from 
 mere openings, in which the best Attack and 
 the best Defence are taught together. The 
 pupil can be formed into a good player, only 
 by preparing him to contend with excellence. 
 To complete the plan, a third book is wanting, 
 b 2 which
 
 XX APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 which ought to stand first; a book of equal 
 games, in which both sides are properly con- 
 ducted, as in many of Philidor's Parties, 
 through the difficulties of the middle part of 
 the contest. 
 
 Again, Mr. Sarratt seems not to be aware, that 
 his peculiar plan, to be equally useful with the 
 common, requires a more rigid adherence to 
 method. Thus, when every game contains, 
 in back- games, the principal variations from 
 the best Attack and Defence, the order of the 
 independent examples is not of much import- 
 ance. But, when the Attack, and Defence, 
 belonging to the same game, are detached into 
 different books, the examples in each book 
 should correspond in order and number. The 
 want of method has betrayed Mr. Sarratt into 
 many inconsistencies. He thinks, that he who 
 plays the King's Gambit has indisputably the 
 disadvantage, and yet inserts it in f( Book I. 
 " containing different methods of opening the, 
 rc game, and taking an advantageous situation 
 
 " 1R
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXI 
 
 t( in the first twelve or fourteen moves.*' In 
 the seventeenth Game of the first book, p. 118*, 
 he censures the second countermove, " Queen's 
 " bishop's pawn a square," against the move of 
 the King's bishop. In " Book II. teaching the 
 " player, who has not the move, to open his 
 " game, and to frustrate his adversary's attack/' 
 p. 34, the same countermove shews itself in an 
 exemplary party. 
 
 As it is much easier to teach a player to 
 lose than to win, he frequently introduces a 
 plurality of DECLARED bad moves into a game : 
 whereas no example should have more than 
 one false step, and all the succeeding should 
 be as 'masterly as they can be played, to prove 
 that defeat is entailed by the move censured. 
 In the Sixth Game, of the first book, p. 60, 
 he remarks, on the second step : " The Black 
 " loses by this," and, on the fourth : This 
 
 * Treatise by J. II. Sarratt, Professor of Chess, 1808. 
 
 b 3 "is
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 " is not a good move." In the Eleventh, p, 90, 
 the first counterstep " might be played better," 
 and the third is pronounced "useless;" but, 
 convenient as such combinations are for the 
 assailant, his accommodation is not completed 
 till the fifth : " The Black loses the game 
 " by this move." The third step of the 
 fourteenth Game had been PROVED, in the 
 opening of the book, to be <e certainly bad," yet 
 it is received into the society of creditable 
 moves, unchallenged as a returned convict ; 
 and the failure of the black is attributed to 
 the fourth move : but as two negatives amount 
 to an affirmative, the player of the two pro- 
 scribed moves has the less inconvenient game. 
 So, in the fifteenth and twenty-fourth Games, 
 there is no demonstration, because the loss is 
 ascribed to successive errors, 
 
 In the Preface, p. xviii. Mr. Sarratt observes; 
 It is easy to prove, that " the player who has 
 " the first move cannot gain any advantage by 
 '' his attack, if his opponent adhere to a regular 
 
 <( svstem.
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXlll 
 
 <( system of defence." In the course of the' 
 examples, p. 189, the following remark comes 
 upon us by surprize : <f Even when the defence 
 " is scientific, he who plays the Queen's Gam- 
 " bit has rather a better game than his adver- 
 " sary." These collisions in the master's mind 
 might involve the pupil in suspense were it 
 not that a third remark, book ii. p. 98, as re- 
 pugnant to the second, as the second is to the 
 first, decides the point as by a casting voice : 
 <e The Black has at least as good a game as 
 '< the White." 
 
 His careless assertions respecting PHILIDOR'S 
 Analysis, confront and beard each other: <e It 
 * f is much to be regretted, that PHILIDOR, 
 " who played pawns with such commanding 
 " skill, should have inserted only two or three 
 " examples*." Preface, p. viii. " In the first 
 
 * If the reader consult the table of contents to the second 
 volume of this work, he will see that " two or three" is a 
 figure of speech for a great number. 
 
 b 4 " game,
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 " game, the White wins solely by the scientific 
 " method, in which he plays his pawns; and 
 " it may be asserted, that no common player 
 " can derive any benefit from it." Preface, 
 p. xviii. " None bat a very good player can 
 ." profit by the rules laid down." Ibid. Now 
 these rules relate chiefly to the management of 
 pawns. 
 
 In the composition of the games, Mr. Sarratt 
 ought distinctly to have stated what was his 
 own, and what he has derived from preceding 
 writers. Will he challenge, as his own, such 
 instructions to play wrong as may be exposed ; 
 or be satisfied to have the finer strokes exclu- 
 sively attributed to himself? 
 
 The flowing outline of our Professor's first 
 game may be found in LOLLI'S Work, p. 359. 
 It is worth while to examine this course of 
 attack, because it is connected with the study 
 of the proper defence. 
 
 The
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXV 
 
 The first moves are : 
 
 1. 
 
 W. King's pawn two squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. bishop to the Q, bishop's 4th. 
 
 B. The same. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn one square. 
 
 The question now is : Whether the Black may safely play 
 the K. knight to the bishop's third ? PHI LI DOR appears, 
 from his FOURTH REGULAR PARTY*, to think that this 
 countermove involves no absolute loss. LOLLI, in unison 
 with the Anonymous Contributor to his // Giuoco degli 
 Scacchi, maintains that it will either entail mischievous 
 consequences, or draw the second player into an unfathom- 
 able vortex. Mr. SARRATT, lastly, has undertaken to 
 demonstrate that the adventurer on this step takes an infe- 
 rior position. These masters conduct the attack and defence 
 for some time alike. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. K. KNIGHT TO THE BISHOP'S 3d. 
 4. 
 
 W. Q. pawn two squares. 
 
 B. The K. pawn takes the pawn, 
 
 5. 
 W. The K. pawn advances. 
 
 B. THE QUEEN TO THE KING'S SECOND. 
 
 <3. W. 
 
 * Vol. ii. p. 91, of the present Work.
 
 XXVI APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The Q. b. pawn takes the K. pawn. [LoLLf 
 breaks off here ; observing that u the first 
 player may maintain two pawns in the centre, 
 to the depression of the adverse game: but 
 which Were tedious to demonstrate/']. 
 
 B. THE K. BISHOP GIVES CHECK. [This is PHI- 
 LIDOR'S counterstep ; who pursues the play as in 
 the Back-game to his Fourth Regular Party.] 
 
 7. 
 
 W. THE KING TO HIS BISHOP'S SQUARE. [Mr. 
 SARRATT makes this move*, which appears to be 
 original on his part : he finishes the attack and 
 defence as follows :] 
 
 " B. K. KNIGHT TO ADVERSE KING'S 4th. 
 
 8. 
 
 " W. The queen to her K. knight's 4th. 
 (( B. Q. b. pawn one square. 
 
 9. 
 
 " W. The queen takes the knight. 
 t( B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 10. 
 
 (( W. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 " B. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 11. 
 
 (f W. The queen takes the pawn. The White has the 
 advantage of two pawns and a good position/' 
 Thus Mr. S. dismisses the party. 
 
 The 
 
 * Treatise by J. H. Sarratt, vol.i. p. 18. Second Back-game to First 
 Game.
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXV11 
 
 The difficulty of finding a satisfactory counterstroke to this 
 ingenious deviation from.the attack of PHILIDOR induced the 
 Author of the Introduction, in the edition of 1810, to allow 
 that the third countermove of the K. knight had placed the 
 second player on inferior ground : but he has since discovered 
 resources for the defence which embolden him to attempt the 
 vindication of that countermove. His latest conclusions 
 with regard to the moves above cited from Mr. S. are these : 
 That " 7. W." is sound and dexterous, but the position 
 taken commands no advantage ; that " 7- B." is the right 
 alternative; that " 8. W." is ineligible, and would permit 
 the second player to gain the attack, and, after at least 
 equalizing the pawns, leave the white party under some per- 
 plexity ; that " 8. B." is unnecessarily weak and dis- 
 tressing, a fine opportunity given by the mode of attack 
 being lost sight of. As the Author of the Introduction has 
 not room here to support these conclusions by a competent 
 chain of examples, he reserves them for a separate treatise, as 
 a Commentary to this edition of Philidor : which treatise 
 will also embrace some new trains of analysis on the King's 
 Gambit, the safety of which is questioned on different grounds 
 by almost all the great masters excepting PHILIDOR. Mean- 
 while, the Author of the Introduction, as responsible for 
 conclusions of which the proofs still remain to be given, is 
 ready to play the defence of the Regular Party opened as 
 above ; taking his first stand on a substitution for the Sth 
 move of the Black in the cited example, should any person 
 like the position of the assailant after " 8. W." 
 
 If we pass to the corresponding game, in the 
 second book, to which Mr. Sarratt refers the 
 Reader for the proper defence, we find a model in 
 which the fallacy is more easily pointed out. 
 
 " i. W.
 
 XXviii APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 1. 
 
 W. The K. P. two steps. 
 " B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. The K. B. to Q. B. fourth square. 
 " B . The same. 
 
 3. 
 
 " W. The Q. B. P. one step. 
 <f B . The Q. to her K. second square. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The Q. P. one step. 
 " B. The same. 
 
 5. 
 
 " W. The K. Kt. to his B. third square. 
 " B . The Q. B. to its K. third square." [It should 
 have leen a duplicate of the white move.] 
 
 6. 
 
 " W. The K. B. takes it. 
 B . The K. B. P. takes the K. B. 
 
 7. 
 
 " W. The Q. B. to the adversary's K. Kt. fourth 
 
 " square. [// were letter to play the queen.'] 
 
 " B . The K. Kt. to its B. third square. 
 8. 
 
 " VV. The Q. Kt. to its Q. second square. 
 
 " B. The same. 
 
 9. 
 
 " W. The king castles. 
 
 " B . The king castles with his R. BOTH GAMES 
 (says the Professor) " ARE VERY WELL 
 " OPENED; and the Black's situation is, to 
 " the full, as secure as the White's." Treatise, 
 vol. ii. page 5. 
 
 If we proceed with the position, as the Pro- 
 fessor
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUED XXIX 
 
 fessor left it, the Black may be compelled to 
 isolate the doubled pawn very inconveniently. 
 
 10. 
 
 W Q. pawn one square. 
 
 B. If the Pawn take, the White, on taking with the Q. 
 b. pawn, will compel the Bishop to retire ; and, 
 then, by pushing the K. pawn, must win a Knight 
 for a Pawn. Therefore the better move is : 
 K. Bishop to Q. knight's third. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The Q. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. Q. knight to Q. bishop's fourth. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's fourth. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The Q. knight takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the knight. 
 
 14. 
 W. The queen to her bishop's second. 
 
 The White must avoid to exchange, so as to spread 
 the two black pawns on the K. file, or to bring 
 one of the other pawns to join them. 
 
 But if we go back to the seventh move, to 
 vary the attack, the defence will appear ill 
 
 composed in another respect. 
 
 * 
 
 7. W.
 
 XXX APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The queen to her knight's third square. 
 B. K. Bishop to Q. knight's third. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. knight to adverse knight's fourth. 
 B. The king to his queen's second. 
 
 Forfeiting the manoeuvre of castling: he cannot 
 otherwise save the pawn. 
 
 9. 
 W. Q. knight to the rook's third. And will win. 
 
 The Author of the Introduction has a plea- 
 sure in acknowledging, that before he had time 
 to look through the Professor's Treatise, a 
 Friend, who considered the Professor's sar- 
 casms as an unhandsome aggression, took an 
 interest in assaying his games, and particularly 
 pointed out the vulnerable position which has 
 been exposed. 
 
 LOLLI has a valuable article on the third 
 countermove, when the queen's bishop's pawn a 
 square follows the duplicate play of each king's 
 pawn and king's bishop. Mr. Sarratt may 
 have derived such of his materials as are found 
 
 ia
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXXI 
 
 in LOLLI, through an intermediate channel. 
 He appears to be unacquainted with this mode 
 of defence. 
 
 i. 
 
 B. The king's pawn to its extent. 
 W. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. bishop's fourth. 
 W. The same. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn one square. 
 W. The queen to her K. knight's fourth. 
 
 4. 
 B. If the black play Q. pawn two squares, the White 
 
 queen will take the K. kn. pawn. Therefore, 
 The queen to her K. bishop's third. 
 W. The queen to her K. knight's third. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. K. knight to the king's second. 
 W. Q. pawn one square. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn one square. 
 W. K. knight to the king's second. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. Q. pawn two squares. 
 
 W. Avoids to take the pawn, that the assailant may 
 not have two pawns in the centre. Therefore, 
 K. bishop retires to Q. knight's third. And th 
 second player is in a valid position. 
 
 Mr, Sarratt announces, among his own im- 
 provements,
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 provements*, "an analysis of the moves cen- 
 " sured by PHILIDOR: The author endea- 
 " vours to prove, that playing the king'* 
 <( knight to its bishop's third square, the second 
 < f move, is very good play." The ANONY- 
 MOUS MODENESE made the same attempt, in 
 the same manner, half a century ago. The 
 Reader will find this well-composed train of 
 play, in a Commentary on PHILIDOR'S Third 
 Party. 
 
 Mr. Sarratt also endeavours to prove, that 
 the " player who plays his queens bishop's pawn 
 " one step, the second move, does not play ill." 
 
 The intended demonstration of this is a copy, 
 with one original trait ; for, proceeding to the 
 seventh move of the second player without a 
 guide, he directs the queen's knight to the bishop's 
 j which is not the apposite move, and 
 
 * Preface, p. xxviii. 
 
 f Vol. i. p. 76. Second Back-game to the Eighth Game. 
 
 the
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXX111 
 
 the defence is without necessity undermined. 
 In the following work, the course of attack 
 by the MODENESE, is subjoined to PHILIDOR'S 
 Fourth Party; and the position of PHILIDOR 
 appears to be invincible. 
 
 The Professor is not happy in selecting an 
 article from PHILIDOR'S Work, which, while 
 others are censured, or commended in under- 
 valuing terms, is distinguished by full applause. 
 His Third Gambit is the Seventh Back-game of 
 the First Gambit of PHILIDOR, converted into a 
 principal model of attack. In its progress, 
 he remarks : " The whole of this game is re- 
 " markably well played. It is one of PHI- 
 " LIDOR'S*/' Now it so happens, that, of 
 eight ramifications from the same principle, 
 this alone has an error, in the effect ascribed 
 to the hinging move, which is the eighth of the 
 Black. When this error is detected, the ninth 
 move of the White becomes unsuitable; and 
 the article will be a pattern of defence, in- 
 
 * Treatise by Mr. Sarratt, vol. i. p. 163. 
 VOL. i. c stead
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 stead of attack, as far as the sixteenth move. 
 Then the position is : 
 
 B 
 
 THE BLACK HAS TO MOVE. 
 
 16. 
 . The Q. knight takes the pawn in K. file. 
 
 IT 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to Q. knight's second square. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's square; and has th 
 superiority. 
 
 Or,
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXXT 
 
 Or, 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's third. 
 B. Th queen to her third square. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The White must not take the undefended Q. r. pawn ; 
 nor attack the queen with the knight. His posi- 
 tion is weak and uncovered. The second player 
 will win. 
 
 The course by which the second player loses, 
 in Mr. Sarratt's Third Gambit, is implicitly 
 adopted, as it was marked out by PHILIDOR, 
 Analysis, vol. i. p. 321. The miscalculation 
 may be thus explained. The White is made 
 to sacrifice a knight for two pawns, to gain a 
 position. The Black pieces are, in consequence, 
 distressed and confined ; and while the player 
 is manoeuvring to extricate them, so as to keep a 
 numerical advantage undiminished, the game is 
 lost. But if the Black make a similar sa- 
 crifice, at a point which escaped PHILIDOR, 
 and which by the MODENESE and other critics 
 has been successively overlooked, the position 
 of the White is totally disconcerted. The Pro- 
 fessor dwells, in his notes, on this game, and 
 reasons on the importance and utility of the 
 faulty step in the series for the defence. 
 
 c 2 Mr.
 
 XXXYi APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. 
 
 Mr. Sarratt concludes his Treatise with some 
 " Critical Situations, won or drawn by bril- 
 " liant and scientific moves." The following 
 is one of them*, with no other alteration than 
 the substitution of a diagram for a verbal de- 
 scription. 
 
 " White to move, and to draw the game." 
 This is a teasing thing to require. The 
 
 * Treatise by Mr. Sarratt, TO!, i. p. 250. 
 
 Amateur
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXXVll 
 
 Amateur is perplexed, perseveres in combating 
 the necessary effects of the position, till he con- 
 cludes that the Proposer of the Problem must 
 have an insight into Chess many degrees 
 deeper than his own ; he then turns to the so- 
 lution in the accompanying volume, and finds 
 the difficulty thus subdued*. 
 
 l. 
 
 " W. The K. to his B. fourth square. 
 
 " B. The K. to his third square." [This is scarcely 
 
 a competent device, if the intention be to lose 
 
 every advantage, unless the next move also takt 
 
 place."] 
 
 2. 
 
 " W. The R. to his K. third square, giving check. 
 " B. The K. to his B. third square. [Were he to 
 
 return to the queen's third, he mould play 
 
 against the adversary.'] 
 
 3. 
 
 W. The R. to its Q. R. third square." [This is a 
 fine stroke , separately considered: but the pre. 
 
 vious false play of the Black vitiates the whole 
 
 example."] 
 " B. If the Black take the R. the White will be stale. 
 
 " mated ; therefore the Black must play his R. 
 
 " either to his Q. Kt. or Q. B. fourth square. 
 
 * Treatise by Mr. Sarratt, vol. ii. p. 308. 
 
 " 4. W.
 
 4- 
 " W. The R. to the adversary's Q. R. third square, 
 
 <{ giving check. 
 " B. The K. to his second square. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The K. takes the K. B. P. 
 " B. The Q. P. one step, checking with the R, 
 
 6. 
 
 " W. The K. to his fourth square. 
 " B. The R. to the adversary's Q. B. fourth square. 
 
 7. 
 
 cc W. The K. to the adversary's Q. fourth square. 
 <{ B. The R. to the adversary's Q. Kt. fourth square, 
 
 8. 
 
 <c W. The K. to the adversary's Q. B. fourth square ; 
 <c and will win the pawn." 
 
 If the pieces be restored to the position in 
 the diagram, it will be easy to- shew, that one 
 of the pawns may be preserved, and queened. 
 
 i. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's fourth. 
 
 B. The rook to adverse Q. rook's square. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. The king takes the K. b. pawn. 
 B. The rook gives check, at adverse K. bishop's square* 
 
 3. 
 
 W. The king to his knight's fourth. 
 B. The king to his fourth. In this position, the rook 
 and pawn can win by force. 
 
 The
 
 APOLOGY AND CRITIQUE. XXXIX 
 
 The Author of the Introduction has stu- 
 diously avoided the language of irony; be- 
 cause it is often the resource of those who 
 cannot directly controvert what they undermine 
 by equivocal compliments. He has plainly ex- 
 posed some defects in the plan and execution 
 of Mr. Sarratt's treatise; and hopes that the 
 Professor will not disdain to remove them. 
 
 CAISSAj
 
 CAISSA; 
 
 OK, 
 
 THE GAME AT CHESS 
 
 A POEM. 
 
 WRITTEN IN THE YEAR 1763, 
 
 BY SIR WILLIAM JONES.
 
 THE first idea of the following piece was taken 
 from a Latin poem of Vida, entitled SCACCHIA LUDUS, 
 which was translated into Italian by Marino, and in- 
 serted in the fifteenth Canto of his Adonis : the author 
 thought it fair to make an acknowledgment in the 
 notes for the passages which he borrowed from those 
 two poets ; but he must also do them the justice to 
 declare, that most of the descriptions, and the whole 
 story of Ca'issa, which is written in imitation of Ovid, 
 are his own, and their faults must be imputed to him 
 only. The characters in the poem are no less ima- 
 ginary than those in the episode ; in which the inven- 
 tion of Chess is poetically ascribed to Mars, though 
 it is certain that the game was originally brought 
 from India.
 
 CAISSA. 
 
 armies on the chequer'd field array'd, 
 And guiltless war in pleasing form display'd ; 
 When two bold kings contend with vain alarms, 
 In ivory this, and that in ebon arms ; 
 Sin#, sportive Maids, that haunt the sacred hill 
 Of Pindus, and the fam'd Pierian rill. 
 t Thou, joy of all below, and all above, 
 Mild Venus, queen of laughter, queen of lore ; 
 Leave thy bright island, where on many a rose 
 And many a pink thy blooming train repose : 
 
 IMITATIONS. 
 
 * Ludimus effigiem belli, simulataque veris 
 Praelia, buxo acies fictas, et ludicra regna : 
 Ut gemini inter se reges, albusque nigerque, 
 Pro laude oppositi certent bicoloribus armis. 
 Dicite, Seriades NympluE, certamina tanta. 
 
 Vidu. 
 
 1 ^Eneadum genitrix, hominum div&mque voluptas, 
 Alma Venus! &c. Lucretius. 
 
 * 2 Assist
 
 4 CAISSA. 
 
 Assist me, goddess ! since a lovely pair 
 Command my song, like thee divinely fair. 
 
 . Near yon cool stream, whose living waters play, 
 And rise translucent in the solar ray ; 
 Beneath the covert of a fragrant bower, 
 Where spring's soft influence purpled every flower ; 
 Two smiling nymphs reclin'd in calm retreat, 
 And envying blossoms crowded round their seat ; 
 Here Delia was enthron'd ; and, by her side, 
 The sweet Sirena ; both in beauty's pride : 
 Thus shine two roses, fresh with early bloom, 
 That from their native stalk dispense perfume ; 
 Their leaves unfolding to the dawning day 
 Gems of the glowing mead, and eyes of May. 
 A band of youths and damsels sat around, 
 Their flowing locks with braided myrtle bound ; 
 Agatis, in the graceful dance admir'd, 
 And gentle Thyrsis, by the muse inspir'd ; 
 With Silvia, fairest of the mirthful train ; 
 And Daphnis, doom'd to love, yet love in vain. 
 Now, whilst a purer blush o'erspreads her cheeks, 
 With soothing accents thus Sirena speaks : 
 
 The
 
 CAISSA. 5 
 
 " The meads and lawns are ting'd with beamy light, 
 " And wakeful larks begin their vocal flight; 
 *' Whilst on each bank the dewdrops sweetly smile; 
 ' e What sport, my Delia, shall the hours beguile ? 
 " Shall heavenly notes, prolong'd with various art-, 
 <( Charm the fond ear, and warm the rapturous heart? 
 <{ At distance shall we view the sylvan chace ? 
 u Or catch with silken lines the finny race?" 
 
 Then Delia thus : " Or rather, since we meet 
 <c By chance assembled in this cool retreat, 
 <c In artful contest let our warlike train 
 " Move well-directed o'er the color 'd plain ; 
 <e Daphnis, who taught us first, the play shall guide ; 
 " Explain its laws, and o'er the field preside : 
 <c No prize we need, our ardour to inflame ; 
 " We fight with pleasure, if we fight for fame." 
 
 i 
 The nymph consents : the maids and youths prepare 
 
 To view the combat, and the sport to share : 
 But Daphnis most approv'd the bold design, 
 Whom Love instructed, and the tuneful Nine. 
 He rose, and on the cedar table plac'd 
 A polish'd board, with differing colours grac'd ; 
 
 B 3 Squares
 
 6 CA1SSA. 
 
 * Squares eight times eight in equal order lie ; 
 
 These bright as snow, those dark with sable dye ; 
 
 Like the broad target by the tortoise born, 
 
 Or like the hide by spotted panthers worn. 
 
 Then from a chest, with harmless heroes stor'd, 
 
 O'er the smooth plain two well-wrought hosts he pour'd; 
 
 The champions burn'd their rivals to assail, 
 
 t Twice eight in black, twice eight in milkwhite mail ; 
 
 In shape and station different, as in name, 
 
 Their motions various, nor their power the same. 
 
 IMITATIONS. 
 
 * Sexaginta insunt et quatuor ordine sedes 
 Octono; parte ex omni, via limite quadrat 
 Ordinibus paribus ; necnon forma omnibus una 
 Sedibus, aequale et spatium, sed non color unus : 
 Alternant semper variae, subeuntque vicissim 
 Albentes nigris ; testudo picta superne 
 
 Qualia devexo gestat discrimina tergo. 
 
 Vida. 
 
 t Agmina bina pari numeroque, et viribus aequis, 
 Bis nivea cum veste octo, totidemque nigranti. 
 Utvariae facies, pariter sunt et sua cuique 
 Nomina, diversum m *nus, non as qua potestas. 
 
 Vida. 
 
 Say,
 
 CAISSA. 7 
 
 Say, muse ! (for Jove has nought from thee conceal'd) 
 Who form'd the legions on the level field ? 
 
 High in the midst the reverend kings appear, 
 And o'er the rest their pearly sceptres rear : 
 One solemn step, majestically slow, 
 They gravely move, and shun the dangerous foe ; 
 If e'er they call> the watchful subjects spring, 
 And die with rapture if they save their king ; 
 On him the glory of the day depends, 
 He once imprison'd, all the conflict ends. 
 
 The queens exulting near their consorts stand ; 
 Each bears a deadly falchion in her hand ; 
 Now here, now there, they bound with furious pride, 
 And thin the trembling ranks from side to side ; 
 Swift as Camilla flying o'er the main, 
 Or lightly skimming o'er the dewy plain : 
 Fierce as they seem, some bold Plebeian spear 
 May pierce their shield, or stop their full career. 
 
 The valiant guards, their minds on havock bent, 
 Fill the next squares, and watch the royal tent ; 
 
 t 4
 
 8 CAISSA. 
 
 Tho' weak their spears, tho' dwarfish be their height, 
 * Compact they move, the bulwark of the fight. 
 
 To right and left the martial wings display 
 Their shining arms, and stand in close array. 
 Behold, four archers, eager to advance, 
 Send the light reed, and rush with sidelong glance ; 
 Through angles ever they assault the foes, 
 True to the colour, which at first they chose. 
 Then four bold knights for courage fam'd and speed, 
 Each knight exalted on a prancing steed : 
 t Their arching course no vulgar limit knows, 
 Transverse they leap, and aim insidious blows: 
 
 IMITATIONS. 
 
 J- II cavallo leggier per dritta lista, 
 
 Come gli altri, 1' arringo unqua non fende, 
 Ma la lizza attraversa, e fiero in vista 
 Curvo in giro, e lunato il salto stende, 
 E sempre nel saltar due case acquista, 
 Quel colore abbandona, e questo prende. 
 
 Marino, Adone. 15. 
 NOTE. 
 
 * The chief art in the Tactics of Chess consists in the nice 
 conduct of the royal pawns ; in supporting them against 
 every attack ; and, if they are taken, in supplying their 
 places with others equally supported : a principle, on which 
 the success of the game in great measure depends, though it 
 seem* to be omitted by the very accurate Vida. 
 
 Nor
 
 CAISSA. 9 
 
 Nor friends, nor foes, their rapid force restrain, 
 
 By one quick bound two changing squares they gain ; 
 
 From varying hues renew the fierce attack, 
 
 And rush from black to white, from white to black. 
 
 Four solemn elephants the sides defend ; 
 
 Beneath the load of ponderous towers they bend : 
 
 In one unalter'd line they tempt the fight ; 
 
 Now crush the left, and now o'er whelm the right* 
 
 Bright in the front the dauntless soldiers raise 
 
 Their polish'd spears ; their steely helmets blaze : 
 
 Prepar'd they stand the daring foe to strike, 
 
 Direct (heir progress, but their wounds oblique. 
 
 Now swell tli' embattled troops with hostile rage, 
 And clang their shields, impatient to engage ; 
 When Daphnis thus : A varied plain behold, 
 Where fairy kings their mimic tents unfold, 
 As Oberon, and Mab his wayward queen, 
 Lead forth their armies on the daisied green. 
 No mortal hand the wond'rous sport contrived, 
 By gods inventedj and from gods deriv'd ;
 
 10 CAISSA. 
 
 * From them the British nymphs receiv'd the game, 
 And piny each morn beneath the crystal Thame ; 
 Hear then the tale, which they to Colin sung, 
 As idling o'er the lucid wave he hung. 
 
 A lovely dryad rang'd the Thracian wild, 
 Her air enchanting, and her aspect mild: 
 To chase the bounding hart was all her joy, 
 Averse from Hymen, and the Cyprian boy ; 
 O'er hills and valleys was her beauty fam'd 
 And fair Caissa was the damsel nam'd. 
 Mars saw the maid ; with deep surprise he gaz'd, 
 Admir'd her shape, and every gesture prais'd : 
 His golden bow the child of Venus bent, 
 And through his breast a piercing arrow sent. 
 The reed was hope ; the feathers, keen desire ; 
 The point, her eyes ; the barbs, ethereal fire. 
 Soon to the nymph he pour'd his tender strain ; 
 The haughty dryad scorn'd his amorous -pain: 
 
 IMITATIONS. 
 
 * Quse quondam sub aquis gaudent spectacla tueri 
 Nereides, vastique omnis gens accola ponti ; 
 Siquando placidum mare, et huniida regna quierunt. 
 
 Vida. 
 
 He
 
 CAISSA. 11 
 
 He told his woes, where'er the maid he found, 
 
 And still he press'd, yet still Ca'issa frown'd ; 
 
 But ev'n her frowns (ah, what might smiles have done!) 
 
 Fir'd all his soul, and all his senses won. 
 
 He left his car, by raging tigers drawn, 
 
 And lonely wander'd o'er the dusky lawn ; 
 
 Then lay desponding near a murmuring stream, 
 
 And fair Caissa was his plaintive theme. 
 
 A naiad heard him from her mossy bed, 
 
 And through the crystal rais'd her placid head ; 
 
 Then mildly spake: " O thou, whom love inspires, 
 
 <e Thy tears will nourish, not allay thy fires. 
 
 <l The smiling blossoms drink the pearly dew; 
 
 " And ripening fruit the feather'd race pursue ; 
 
 " The scaly shoals devour the silken weeds ; 
 
 " Love on our sighs, and on our sorrow feeds. 
 
 " Then weep no more ; but, ere thou canst obtain 
 
 " Balm to thy wounds, and solace to thy pain, 
 
 <c With gentle art thy martial look beguile ; 
 
 f( Be mild, and teach thy rugged brow to smile. 
 
 " Canst thou no play, no soothing game devise, 
 
 " To make thee lovely in the damsel's eyes? 
 
 ** So may thy prayers assuage the scornful dame, 
 
 (t And e'en Caissa own a mutual flame." 
 
 " Kind
 
 12 CAISSA. 
 
 " Kind nymph, said Mars, thy counsel I approve ; 
 t( Art, only art, her ruthless breast can move. 
 *' But when ? or how ? Thy dark discourse explain : 
 " So may thy stream ne'er swell with gushing rain ; 
 " So may thy waves in one pure current flow, 
 fe And flowers eternal on thy border blow !" 
 
 To whom the maid replied with smiling mien : 
 11 Above the palace of the Paphian queen 
 ft * Love's brother dwells, a boy of graceful port, 
 ft By gods nam'd Euphron, and by mortals Sport : 
 " Seek him ; to faithful ears unfold thy grief, 
 " And hope, ere morn return, a sweet relief. 
 u His temple hangs below the azure skies ; 
 " Seest thou yon argent cloud ? 'Tis there it lies." 
 This said, she sunk beneath the liquid plain, 
 And sought the mansion of her blue-hair'd train. 
 
 IMITATIONS. 
 
 * Ecco d' astuto ingegno, e pronta matio 
 Garzon, che sempre scherza, e v'ola ratto, 
 j s' apella, ed e d' amor germano. 
 
 Marino, Adone. 15. 
 Meantime
 
 CAISSA. 13 
 
 Meantime the god, elate with heart-felt joy, 
 Had reach 'd the temple of the sportful boy ; 
 He told Caissa's charms, his kindled fire, 
 The naiad's counsel, and his warm desire. 
 " Be swift," he added, " give my passion aid; 
 " A god requests." He spake, and Sport obey'd. 
 He fram'd a tablet of celestial mold, 
 Inlay'd with squares of silver and of gold ; 
 Then of two metals form'd the warlike band, 
 That here compact in show of battle stand ; 
 He taught the rules that guide the pensive game, 
 And call'd it Cassa from the dryad's name : 
 (Whence Albion's sons, who most its praise confess, 
 Approv'd the play, and nam'd it thoughtful Chess.) 
 The god delighted thank'd indulgent Sport ; 
 Then grasp'd the board, and left his airy court. 
 With radiant feet he pierc'd the clouds ; nor stay'd, 
 Till in the woods he saw the beauteous maid : 
 Tir'd with the chase the damsel sat reclin'd, 
 Her girdle loose, her bosom unconfin'd. 
 He took the figure of a wanton faun, 
 And stood before her on the flowery lawn ; 
 Then show'd his tablet : pleas'd the nymph survey'd 
 The lifeless troops in glittering ranks display'd ; 
 
 She
 
 14 CAISSA. 
 
 She ask'd the wily sylvan to explain 
 
 The various motions of the splendid train ; 
 
 With eager heart she caught the winning lore, 
 
 And thought ev'n Mars less hateful than before ; 
 
 " What spell," said she, "deceiv'd my careless mind? 
 
 '* The god was fair, and I was most unkind." 
 
 She spoke, and saw the changing faun assume 
 
 A milder aspect, and a fairer bloom ; 
 
 His wreathing horns, that from his temples grew, 
 
 Flow'd down in curls of bright celestial hue ; 
 
 The dappled hairs, that veil'd his loveless face, 
 
 Blaz'd into beams, and show'd a heavenly grace; 
 
 The shaggy hide, that mantled o'er his breast, 
 
 Was soften 'd to a smooth transparent vest, 
 
 That ^through its folds his vigorous bosom show'd, 
 
 And nervous limbs, where youthful ardour glow'd : 
 
 (Had Venus view'd him in those blooming charms, 
 
 Not Vulcan's net had forc'd her from his arms.) 
 
 With goatlike feet no more he mark'd the ground, 
 
 But braided flowers his silken sandals bound. 
 
 The dryad blush'd ; and, as he press'd her, smil'd, 
 
 Whilst all his cares one tender glance beguil'd. 
 
 He ends : To arms, the maids and striplings cry; 
 To arms, the groves and sounding vales reply. 
 
 Sirena
 
 CAISSA. 15 
 
 Sirena led to war the swarthy crew, 
 And Delia those that bore the lily's hue. 
 Who first, O muse, began the bold attack ; 
 The white refulgent, or the mournful black? 
 Fair Delia first, as favoring lots ordain, 
 Moves her pale legions tow'rd the sable train : 
 From thought to thought her lively fancy flies, 
 Whilst o'er the board she darts her sparkling eyes. 
 
 At length the warrior moves with haughty strides; 
 Who from the plain the snowy king divides : 
 With equal haste his swarthy rival bounds ; 
 His quiver rattles, and his buckler sounds: 
 Ah ! hapless youths, with fatal warmth you burn ; 
 Laws, ever fix'd, forbid you to return. 
 Then from the wing a short-liv'd spearman flies, 
 Unsafely bold, and see! he dies, he dies : 
 The dark-brow'd hero, with one vengeful blow, 
 Of life and place deprives his ivory foe. 
 Now rush both armies o'er the burnish'd field, 
 Hurl the swift dart, and rend the bursting shield. 
 Here furious knights on fiery coursers prance, 
 Here archers spring, and lofty towers advance* 
 But see ! the white-rob'd Amazon beholds 
 Where the dark host its opening van unfolds : 
 
 Soon
 
 16 CAISSi. 
 
 Soon as her eye discerns the hostile maid, 
 By ebon shield, and ebon helm betray 'd; 
 Seven squares she passes with majestic mien, 
 And stands triumphant o'er the falling queen. 
 Perplex'd, and sorrowing at his consort's fate, 
 The monarch burn'd with rage, despair, and hate: 
 Swift from his zone th' avenging blade he drew. 
 And, mad with ire, the proud virago slew. 
 Meanwhile sweet-smiling Delia's wary king 
 Retir'd from fight behind the circling wing. 
 
 Long time the war in equal balance hung ; 
 Till, unforeseen, an ivory courser sprung, 
 And, wildly prancing in an evil hour, 
 Attack'd at once the monarch and the tower : 
 Sirena blush'd; for, as the rules requir'd, 
 Her injur'd sovereign to his tent retir'd ; 
 Whilst her lost castle leaves its threatening height, 
 And adds new glory to th' exulting knight. 
 
 At this, pale fear oppress'd the drooping maid, 
 And on her cheek the rose began to fade : 
 A crystal tear, that stood prepar'd to fall, 
 She wip'd in silence, and conceal'd from all ; 
 
 From
 
 CAISSA. 
 
 Prom all but Daphnis ; lie remark'd her pain, 
 And saw the weakness of her ebort train; 
 Then gently spoke : " Let me your loss supply, 
 * e And either nobly win, or nobly die; 
 " Me oft has fortune crown'd with fair success, 
 " And led to triumph in the fields of Chess." 
 He said : the willing nymph her place resign'd, 
 And sat at distance on the bank reclin'd. 
 Thus when Minerra call'd her chief to arms, 
 And Troy's high turret shook with dire alarms, 
 The Cyprian goddess wounded left the plain, 
 And Mars engag'd a mightier force in vain. 
 
 Strait Daphnis leads his squadron to the field ; 
 (To Delia's arms 'tis ev'n a joy to yield.) 
 Each guileful snare, and subtle art he tries, 
 But finds his heart less powerful than her eyes: 
 Wisdom and strength superior charms obey ; 
 And beauty, beauty, wins the long-fought day* 
 By this, a hoary * chief, on slaughter bent, 
 Approach'd the gloomy king's unguarded tent; 
 Where, late, his consort spread dismay around, 
 Now her dark corse lies bleeding on the ground. 
 
 * Hoary, white, silyery. 
 YOL,I. C 
 
 17
 
 18 CAISSA. 
 
 Hail, happy youth ! thy glories not unsung 
 Shall live eternal on the poet's tongue ; 
 For thou shall soon reeeive a splendid change^ 
 And o'er the plain with nobler fury range. 
 The swarthy leaders saw the storm impend, 
 And strove in vain their sovereign to defend : 
 Th' invader wav'd his silver lance in air, 
 And flew like lightning to the fatal square j 
 His limbs dilated in a moment grew 
 To stately height, and widen'd to the view ; 
 More fierce his look, more lion-like his mien, 
 Sublime he mov T d, and seem'd a warrior queen. 
 As when the sage on some unfolding plant 
 Has caught a wandering fly, or frugal ant, 
 His hand the microscopic frame applies, 
 *And lo! a bright hair'd monster meets his eyes; 
 He sees new plumes in slender cases roll'd ; 
 Here stain'd with azure, there bedropp'd with gold ; 
 Thus, on the alter'd chief both armies gaze, 
 And both the kings are fix'd with deep amaze. 
 The sword, which arnvd the snow-white maid before^ 
 He now assumes, and hurls the spear no more ; 
 Then springs indignant on the dark-rob'd band, 
 And knights and archers feel his deadly hand. 
 
 Now
 
 CAISSA. 19 
 
 Now flies the monarch of the sable shield, 
 
 His legions vanquish 'd, o'er the lonely field : 
 
 * So when the morn, by rosy coursers drawn, 
 
 With pearls and rubies sows the verdant lawn, 
 
 AVhilst each pale star from heaven's blue vault retires, 
 
 Still Venus gleams, and last of all expires. 
 
 He hears, where'er he moves, the dreadful sound ; 
 
 Check tlie deep vales, and Check the woods rebound. 
 
 No place remains : he sees the certain fate, 
 
 And yields his throne to ruin, and Checkmate. 
 
 A brighter blush o'erspreads the damsel's cheeks, 
 And mildly thus the conquer'd stripling speaks : 
 " A double triumph, Delia, hast thou won, 
 " By Mars protected, and by Venus' son ; 
 (( The first with conquest crowns thy matchless art, 
 " The second points those eyes at Daphnis* heart." 
 
 IMITATIONS. 
 
 Medio rex aequore inermis 
 
 Constitit amissis sociis : velut aethere in alto 
 Expulit ardentes flammas ubi lutea bigis 
 Luciferis Aurora, tuus pulcherrimus ignis 
 Lucet adhuc, Venus, et coelo mox ultimus exit. 
 
 Vida, ver. 604. 
 C 2 She
 
 CAISSA. 
 
 She smil'd ; the nymphs and amorous youths arise, 
 And own that beauty gain'd the nobler prize. 
 
 Low in their chest the mimic troops were lay'd, 
 * And peaceful slept the sable hero's shade. 
 
 * A parody of the last line in Pope's translation of the Iliad, 
 <l And peaceful slept the mighty Hector's shade,"
 
 A 
 SYSTEMATIC 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 TO 
 
 THE GAME OF CHESS.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 
 Clementatp Jngtituteg. 
 
 THE Board on which this game is played, 
 like that used at Draughts., is a square, divided 
 into sixty-four smaller squares, and checquered 
 black and white. At Chess these squares have 
 the technical name of houses, and are all used 
 in play. 
 
 In placing the board, care must be taken that 
 a white corner square be at the right hand of 
 each player. When the board stands in this 
 position, the several ranges of houses running 
 in a strait line from left to right, are called ranks i 
 those perpendicular to them, running from one 
 player to the other, take the name of files, and 
 the two ranges, sloping from one corner of the 
 board to the opposite., ( one of white, the other 
 
 c 4 of
 
 24 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 of black squares) touching at the corner, are 
 diagonals; so are the shorter ranges which run 
 in a parallel direction. 
 
 THE PIECES 
 
 Allotted to each competitor are sixteen, viz. a 
 king, a queen, two bishops, two knights, two 
 rooks, and eight pawns. As a necessary dis- 
 tinction, each set is coloured in a different 
 way ; one is commonly white, the other red or 
 black. 
 
 THE DISPOSITION OF THE PIECES ON THE 
 BOARD 
 
 Is as follows : The white king is to be seated on 
 the first or nearest rank, on the fourth house 
 (a black one) from that corner of the board 
 which is to the right of the player to whom he 
 belongs ; his queen close to him on his left, on, 
 a house of her own colour on one side of 
 each of these, a bishop adjoining each of the 
 tishops, a knight and, last, at the corners of 
 the board, the two rooks. Having thus ar- 
 ranged the first line, let the whole of the se- 
 cond rank be occupied by the pawns, one be- 
 fore
 
 ELEMENTARY INSTITUTES. 23 
 
 fore each of the pieces. As to the counter set, 
 the black king is to be placed on the farther 
 side of the board, opposite the white one his 
 queen opposite the white queen and so on ; 
 placing all the pieces opposite those of corre- 
 sponding denominations ; the pawns on the se- 
 cond rank as before. 
 
 To illustrate what has been said, as well as to 
 show the forms of the pieces, the plate forming 
 the frontispiece is given. 
 
 THEIR POWERS AND MODE OF ACTION. 
 
 The gradation observed in describing these, 
 rising from the lowest to the higher pieces, will 
 show the comparative worth of each order. 
 
 I. Of the PAWN. When one of the pawns 
 is moved, it must be along the file in which he 
 has been first placed, in a straight line toward 
 the adverse party. The first move may be 
 either one or two squares, at the option of the 
 player : after which, no pawn can advance more 
 than one house at a time*. Having been once 
 brought out, a pawn, more restrained than any 
 other piece, cannot retreat or move back. He 
 
 is 
 
 * The latitude in the first move of the pawn is controlled 
 in one relation. An unmoved pawn has no absolute right 
 to pass by a pawn of the opposite set which has come for- 
 ward, on an adjoining file, three squares or to the fifth of the 
 file : the former may make the extended step, but is liable 
 to be taken by the latter In passing, as if it had moved but 
 one square. The ground for this exception is discussed in 
 the APPENDIX, at the end of vol. ii.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 is prohibited too from quitting his own file for 
 that of another, except to make a capture ; in 
 which operation he moves obliquely forward into 
 the next file, to the right or left (as may be re- 
 quired) one house forward ; placing himself on 
 the square of the piece taken", which is removed 
 from the board; he is afterwards confined to 
 moving directly forward as before, and cannot 
 leave his new file for another, but on a similar 
 occasion to that which led him into it. 
 
 A pawn, like every other agent on the board, 
 can take any piece that stands within his rays of 
 action, from one of his own quality to the queen. 
 
 The pawn may be QUEENED. See the section 
 following the description of the king, and the refe- 
 rence thence to the Laws of Chess. 
 
 II. The KNIGHT. The move of the knight 
 is peculiar to that piece, and difficult to explain. 
 It is two squares at once (three, including his 
 own) in a direction partly diagonal and partly 
 straight. The house to which he steps is always 
 of a different colour from that which he leaves. 
 It may likewise be said to be uniformly next but 
 one to the latter; although in his passage to 
 
 it 
 
 All the higher pieces, in making a capture, alike occupy 
 the place of the enemy removed : but differ from the pawn, 
 in taking precisely in the same direction as they move.
 
 ELEMENTARY INSTITUTES. *< 
 
 it he passes transversely over the corners of 
 two. 
 
 The knight's power of capture reaches to any 
 square into which his move will take him. 
 
 Note That this is the only piece that has a 
 vaulting motion, or that is not precluded from 
 going to a square, between which and his own 
 other pieces intervene: just to shew what is 
 meant, if good play permitted it, any one of 
 the knights could move out before a pawn had 
 stirred, alighting on the third square of either 
 the bishop or the rook; without waiting, as 
 other pieces are obliged, till an opening be 
 made. 
 
 III. The BISHOP. By observing the plate 
 it will be seen, that the bishops of the same set 
 are placed on squares of a different colour ; the 
 white king's bishop, for instance, being seated 
 on a white, and the white queen's bishop on 
 a black square. What makes it necessary to 
 remark this, which is common to the knight 
 and rook, is, that the bishop, unlike all the 
 other pieces, is obliged to walk, throughout 
 the game, on that colour of the exchequer* 
 that he was placed on at the commencement 
 
 * A technical name for the board. 
 
 Of
 
 28 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 of it ; which is a necessary consequence of his 
 motion being purely diagonal. His step is in 
 other respects quite unlimited, as he may, at a 
 single effort, go any length of squares from 
 one to eight. The bishop, if the road be open, 
 takes at any distance. 
 
 IV. The ROOK. The rook moves in strait 
 lines parallel to the sides of the board, forward 
 or sideways. It can, at one step, pass along a 
 whole rank, or a whole file, or stop short at 
 the first, second, third, or any other square of 
 a rank or file, as occasion may require. Like 
 the bishop, and on the same condition, it takes 
 at any distance*. 
 
 V. The QUEEN unites the moves of the 
 bishop and rook; and like them, when the field 
 is clear, takes at any distance. 
 
 * Having dismissed the last of the pieces, of which there 
 are more than one of a sort, in order to confirm the reader 
 in what he might suppose, and to leave him no question 
 to make, we turn aside to observe to him, that the dif- 
 ference in the worth of pieces of the same kind, is indeed 
 next to nothing ; that the little odds there is, between su. 
 perior pieces of the same description, is in favour of that 
 on the king's side ; and that of the four center pawns, 
 which are reckoned something the best, the king's bishop's 
 pawn is the most esteemed. 
 
 VI. The
 
 ELEMENTARY INSTITUTES. 29 
 
 VI. The KING except when he avails him- 
 lelfof the privilege of castling, can move only 
 one square at a time; of course he can take at 
 ho greater distance : he may, however, both 
 move and take either foward, backward, side- 
 ways, or aslant. When the removal of the 
 bishop and knight on the right, or of the 
 bishop, knight, and queen, on the left, has ren- 
 dered it effectible without any violence to pro- 
 priety, the king may castle with either of his 
 rooks; which is done on the king's side, by 
 placing the king on the knight's square, and the 
 rook on the other side of the king, on the 
 bishop's square; and on the queen's side, by 
 placing the king on the bishop's square, and 
 the rook on the queen's square. This 
 ambidextral manoeuvre of moving two pieces 
 at the same time, the player is allowed to em- 
 ploy but once in a game. It is a prevalent law 
 that the king shall not castle when in check, 
 nor when he has previously moved, nor with 
 a rook that has moved. The only prerogative 
 of the king, is a great one; that of never being 
 taken. 
 
 
 OF
 
 SO INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 OP PROMOTING A PAWN TO BE A QUEEN, 
 ROOK, &C. 
 
 When a pawn has penetrated to the farthest 
 rank on the adverse side of the board, he is 
 rewarded with promotion to the highest vacant 
 dignity* ; that is to say, if the person playing 
 him there has lost his queen, he succeeds to 
 the honor. If instead of his queen one or 
 both of the rooks be lost, he is made a rook. 
 If the queen and rooks have escaped cap- 
 ture, he is made a bishop. If the bishops 
 have likewise been preserved, he is made a 
 knight. The ceremony of transformation 
 taking place in either case, and w^hich is ne- 
 cessary to distinguish him, is very short: a 
 sort of exchange : The pawn is removed from 
 the board, and put among those taken by the 
 adversary; and a captured piece, of the de- 
 nomination he is advanced to, is taken from 
 thence, and substituted in his room. It can 
 hardly be necessary to say that his powers 
 and mode of action alter with his quality. 
 
 * A pawn may become a queen, while the queen is still 
 on the board, according to the Laws of Chess, at the end of 
 Chap. II. 
 
 OF
 
 ELEMENTARY INSTITUTES. 31 
 
 OF GIVING CHECK, AND CHECK-MATE. 
 
 Upon this the game hinges. As the king is, 
 never taken, whenever an adversary is advanced 
 upon him in such a manner, as that, remaining 
 where he is, if he were any other piece, he would 
 be captured ; the person advancing it is to 
 salute him with the word " Check," warning 
 him of his situation, upon which it is indispen- 
 sable that he should alter it in one of the fol- 
 lowing ways: either, relatively, by taking the 
 threatening piece, or interposing* one of his 
 own between that and himself; or, positively, by 
 withdrawing to a square which is not at the 
 moment exposed to the action of an adverse 
 piece. If he cannot do one of these, the game 
 is lost. This inextricable contact with an adverse 
 piece is technically termed CHECK-MATE. 
 
 OF GIVING A STALE. 
 
 The game may be lost too in a manner quite 
 opposite. By the constitution of Chess, the 
 
 * Note This second mode of defending himself cannot 
 be practised when he is checked by the knight, owing to 
 the vaulting motion of that piece ; he must then have re- 
 course to either the first, or the third : and should he be 
 checked by any two pieces at once, which is called double 
 cheeky the third only will avail. 
 
 king
 
 52 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 king is on no account to move into check ; and, 
 therefore, when, as it will sometimes happen, 
 one party has crowded up the king of the other 
 with so many pieces, that the only move left 
 him would take him into check; if the person 
 to whom the king so circumstanced belongs has 
 no other piece, or no other that can be moved, 
 the contest must necessarily stagnate. Come to 
 an end before the arrival of the regular re- 
 sult, it can be proceeded in no further. The 
 game is not, however, undecided. The player 
 giving the other the stale, (so, in the language 
 of Chess, the dilemma which the king is in is 
 called ) is ruled to have defeated himself. This 
 institute, though immemorially transmitted, is 
 neutralized by some innovators, who refuse to 
 extract a stimulus to ingenuity from an una- 
 voidable imperfection in the machinery of the 
 game. See, infra, LAWS OF CHESS, XVI. note. 
 
 REASONS FOR ASSIGNING THE VICTORY 
 
 TO THE PARTY SUFFERING THE 
 
 STALE-MATE. 
 
 A little reflection will shew that this rule is 
 not incapable of the justification which at first 
 sight it may seem to want. It is an embarrass- 
 ing subject for legislation in the game, that it 
 
 4 
 
 u
 
 ELEMENTARY INSTITUTES. S3 
 
 is perpetually liable to an incidental situation 
 which renders it indecisive, through a cause 
 quite distinct from equal play. The only way 
 to counteract the recurrence of this situation, 
 is to institute an artificial rule, awarding the 
 victory, whenever a stale happens, to one party 
 or the other. 
 
 The necessity of making some kind of deci- 
 sion being arrived at, the propriety of placing 
 the bias where it is may be easily evinced. 
 
 It is to be recollected that the rule under 
 discussion, and the different rule, not yet fami- 
 liar in England, that a stale is a drawn game, 
 are equally arbitrary. The expediency of an 
 arbitrary rule, however great, cannot entirely 
 divest it of the dissatisfactory; and therefore 
 the seldomer there is occasion for it the better : 
 now the making him, to lose by a stale, who 
 may always avoid it by caution, is an effective 
 bar to its happening very often. 
 
 The principal effect of this rule highly re- 
 commends it. Whenever the critical case to 
 which it is applied, is likely to occur, a greater 
 exertion of intellect in conducting the approach is 
 incited; than which nothing can be more 
 agreeable to the genius of the game, as the 
 professed object of Chess is to call out the 
 powers of the mind. 
 
 VOL. i. D Thug
 
 34 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS, 
 
 Thus a defect inherent iu the structure of the 
 game, and from which it were impossible to 
 free it, is overruled so as to give it a higher 
 degree of interest. Upon the whole, the ne- 
 cessity for this rule is not to be deplored. 
 
 OF A DRAWN GAME. 
 
 It may be superfluous to add, that whenever, 
 from the greatness of the loss on each side, (the 
 more potent pieces, and those capable of be- 
 coming so, being gone, ) or from any other 
 cause, it becomes certain that neither party can 
 give the other Check-mate ; the game is to be 
 discontinued as insipid and useless, the players 
 consenting to draw their pieces, to court de- 
 cision in a new party. 
 
 . 
 
 ' 
 i 
 
 : <H; ; 
 . 
 
 'lv> $35 
 
 i 
 
 '
 
 * 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 General 
 
 TO WHICH ARE ANNEXED 
 
 THE LAWS OF CHESS. 
 
 THESE questions occur at every evolution 
 What piece is to be moved f What square is it to 
 be moved to ? After the first time,, for a reason 
 obvious to the practical player, ( the abstraction 
 from any particular situation which, from the 
 latitude of moves in the power of the adversary, 
 the mind of the theorist is forced to make, ) we 
 can only give helps for the reader himself to de- 
 cide them. 
 
 The game cannot be better opened than by 
 advancing the king's pawn two squares. Whe- 
 ther a pawn or a superior piece should engage 
 second, will depend greatly on the moves of the 
 opposite party. As there is danger, in general, 
 in moving the king's bishop's pawn one square, 
 and great effect to be derived from moving him 
 two, the king's bishop's must rarely, at the out- 
 set, be employed to support the king's pawn. In 
 examples given both in the Introduction and Ana- 
 D 2 lysis,
 
 36 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 lysis, the following question is considered. " The 
 " king's pawn is attacked by the adverse knight : 
 " Should it be sustained by the queen's pawn, 
 " or the queen's knight ; or, leaving it exposed, 
 " should the king's bishop's pawn be moved two 
 " squares ?" 
 
 The player can seldom escape the inconve- 
 nience of either obstructing the pawns by the 
 pieces, or the pieces by the pawns, but each is 
 to be avoided as much as possible. Where the 
 pawns are not equal to support or cover each 
 other, the pieces must sustain them*. 
 
 In regular parties, the king's bishop is, in 
 general, the first piece brought out. Bishops 
 are more calculated, in the early part of the 
 game, to make impression than knights ; and as 
 they move obliquely, are not so liable as knights 
 to be attacked by adverse pawns, as a pawn 
 attacking a bishop must be defended. 
 
 * At Chess, defence is promoted in three irays: 1. One 
 piece, to support another, is placed so that if the piece he is 
 designed to guard were an opponent he could take him: 
 The protection results from the adversary's being deterred 
 from a capture by the certainty of a reprisal. 2. It is placed 
 so as to cover the piece attacked, interposing between that 
 and the adversary. 3. It commands, by its action, that part 
 of the field into which an opposite piece must move to bear 
 on the piece defended. The king can be guarded only in 
 th two latter model. 
 
 I 

 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 37 
 
 In gambits, the knights commonly move 
 before the bishops ; because the adverse pawn, 
 which might be troublesome, is displaced, 
 and because their own pawn, which would 
 be obstructed, is exchanged: but gambits 
 are only to be learnt from particular ex- 
 amples; and as we are engaged in general 
 maxims that apply to regular parties, it is suf- 
 ficient barely to mention them. 
 
 Jn regular parties, Philidor teaches that bring- 
 ing out the king's bishop at the second move is 
 decidedly safer than bringing out the king's 
 knight. Some professors and good players dis- 
 ent from ibis : Several games, both in the In- 
 troduction and the Analysis, turn upon this early 
 attack of the knight and the best mode of coun- 
 teracting it. 
 
 Prudence forbid* precipitation in playing the 
 pieces offensively ; because fry every one that 
 is driven back you lose a move: but when a 
 few pieces have been changed*, or the game is 
 
 * To change or exchange pieces is to surrender one or two 
 of your own to take one or two of the adversary's. It 
 serves to clear the board, and enlarge the scene of action ; 
 and, when you get a piece of greater yalue than that lost, 
 it encreases your comparative strength. The even exchange 
 is only to be made with caution, and of those pieces for 
 which you have the kast occasion. 
 
 p 3 advanced,
 
 38 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 advanced, and the pawns which you intend to 
 push will not be impeded, you may make sorties 
 with the knights and bishops on the most un- 
 guarded of the adversaries. 
 
 The queen must not be moved hastily: for 
 offence in particular, not till some kind of me- 
 thod pervades the rest of your pieces and you 
 can collect what aspect the game will assume. 
 To engage this piece in active hostility before 
 you had digested a set of measures, and had a 
 probable certainty of succeeding in them, 
 would be entirely to misemploy her great 
 powers. 
 
 As the rooks, while the game is crouded, 
 can effect nothing worthy their attempting; 
 generally speaking it is advisable to keep them 
 in reserve till towards the conclusion of the 
 game. The usefulness of the rook, gradually 
 increasing as the crisis approaches, is then very 
 little inferior to that of the queen*. 
 
 The king is rarely to act offensively. He is 
 to be put where he will be least open to attack ; 
 and, while a fatal one is possible, neither move 
 
 '. 
 
 * To the adversary's king stript of his attendants, the 
 rook, with the sole assistance of his own king, is capable of 
 giving check-mate beyond the possibility of elusion ; a de. 
 gree of power which no other piece besides the queen pos. 
 esses. 
 
 nor
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 39 
 
 nor take but w ith a view to his own defence. 
 The two points to which every thing else is 
 to subserve, are, the giving clieck-mate to the 
 adversary's king, and the preservation of your 
 own. 
 
 To unfold the right mode of effecting these 
 as fully as Theory is able to do; it will be ne- 
 cessary to be something more particular. 
 
 1. If you propose to castle on the king's 
 side, the knight's, and rook's pawns must not 
 be moved without great necessity, because the 
 principal motive for the measure is the pro- 
 tection he will receive by retiring behind 
 them. The Book's pawn is, however, some- 
 times moved a square, to prevent an adverse 
 bishop from coming to the knight's 4th; and 
 as the king, in castling on the queen's side, 
 does not at the moment support the pawn 
 which the rook leaves, the queen's rook's pawn 
 is sometimes moved a square, both to contract 
 the range of the adverse bishop, and to ensure 
 its own safety. 
 
 2. The other pawns must be kept together 
 and well supported ; and not suffered to strag- 
 gle forwards alone. A party of these, ma- 
 naged with address, may, in a future part of 
 
 D 4 the
 
 40 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 the game, repair the loss of a capital piece, or 
 do some other signal service. 
 
 3. While you are concerting the attack of 
 the adversary, endeavour, without neglect- 
 ing any thing of more importance, to have 
 your own king so circumstanced that he may 
 castle when he pleases. Should this conve- 
 nience be effected, if his not being castled be 
 no obstruction to your other operations, let 
 him remain at his own square, till there is 
 a necessity for his going to the retreat secured 
 for him. The advantage to be gained by 
 this procedure is, that the adversary will 
 be obliged to form two distinct systems of 
 attack. 
 
 4. As soon as the adversary has castled, if it 
 be on a different side of the board from that 
 on which you have castled, or intend to castle, 
 let your pawns opposite bear down upon his 
 king. The queen and what other pieces you 
 can spare, in particular the rook to whom the 
 advance of the pawns opens the field, must sup- 
 port them in this onset*. 
 
 * If the adversary castles on the same side with you, an 
 adherence to what is contained in the first section will lead 
 you to attack him with the superior pieces only. 
 
 5. Where
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 41 
 
 5. Where a direct attack upon the adver- 
 sary's king is impolitic or impracticable, en- 
 deavour to take, dislodge, or exchange those 
 of his pieces that make an immediate attack 
 difficult or dangerous. 
 
 6. An ineffectual check, or a check that th& 
 adversary can easily elude, is in general to be 
 refrained from; as apt to lead to loss of move, 
 loss of the checking piece, and so on. Ex- 
 perience, however, will furnish a few cases, in 
 which there is a propriety in giving such a 
 check : Where it will force the adversary's 
 king into a more exposed situation where the 
 movement, necessary to avert it, will leave a 
 capital piece unguarded where the adversary's 
 king not having castled, nor being in a con- 
 dition to do so, it will force him by moving to 
 forfeit that privilege and where, having a 
 piece of your own attacked that you are not 
 able otherwise to save, it will cause the re- 
 moval of some piece that impedes his escape. 
 
 7. In defending your king when closely at- 
 tacked where it will either cause the adver- 
 sary to lose a move, or encrease your com- 
 parative strength, or save a piece however 
 small; and at the same time, be a successful 
 means of parrying the check you should offer 
 to make an exchange of pieces. 
 
 8. If
 
 42 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 8. If the king be castled, the pawns form- 
 ing a cordon before, or round him, should be 
 guarded as much as possible from the brunts 
 of the adversary. 
 
 9. Whenever, from being either reduced in 
 number, or obliged to quit their stations, the 
 defence afforded the king by these becomes 
 precarious or whenever the king is not cas- 
 tled at all some of the superior pieces should 
 be kept in readiness to contribute actively to 
 his safety; being posted so, that where they 
 cannot prevent, they may at least cover him 
 from check. Their number and quality cir- 
 cumstances must decide. Those that operate 
 at a distance, will not on this service be out 
 of their province ; nor will it often be found 
 of them, as .it will of the knights, that they 
 are thereby rendered the less prepared to act 
 offensively. The keeping, too, such pieces as 
 the rook, the bishop, or the queen, near your 
 own king, may sometimes cause the adversary 
 to rela?( in his caution where it does not add 
 to his security. 
 
 10. It must, however, be constantly re- 
 membered of the queen, that she must never 
 stand in such a way before the king, as that 
 were an adverse rook or bishop to attack her, 
 her moving aside would leave the king in 
 
 check ;
 
 PENERAL $1 AX I MS. 4r3 
 
 pheck ; because were she to be so attacked, 
 should the rook or bishop be well guarded, 
 and should you have no piece to interpose, as the 
 king must not be uncovered to a check, you 
 could not avoid losing her for a less valuable 
 piece. 
 
 11. Great advantages are often gained by 
 an ambuscade ; which is the having one piece, 
 a pawn for instance, so placed before ano- 
 ther, we will say the queen, that though the 
 adversary, on a cursory view, might seem to 
 be safe ; yet by simply playing the piece in 
 front, whose intervention alone keeps him 
 from it, check, single, or double*, will be 
 discovered to his king. 
 
 12. While intent on projects of offence, 
 take care that you are not surprised yourself. 
 Indeed every detail of a stratagem to be prac- 
 tised on the adversary, carries with it a tacit 
 admonition to beware of the like from him ; 
 as every caution against a dangerous evolu- 
 tion, implies, " look out for an opportunity 
 to practise it." 
 
 * A rook and a bishop may be placed so that the ad- 
 versary's king is in check with neither ; and yet by moving 
 that nearest him forwards or sideways, he will be in check 
 with both; and so with respect to other pieces. 
 
 13. Take
 
 44 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 13. Take care that an adverse pawn doe 
 not advance upon two superior pieces, which 
 is called forking them; knights and rooks are 
 particularly liable to be attacked in this way, 
 the pawns not requiring to be guarded, be- 
 cause the moves of those pieces do not com- 
 prehend the moves of the pawn. Thus where 
 there is not a reciprocity in the mode of action 
 between a smaller and a larger piece, the 
 approach of the smaller may be very dan- 
 gerous. 
 
 14. Hence it is, that unremitting vigilance 
 must be exerted throughout the game, to 
 prevent either of the adverse knights from 
 checking the king and queen at the same 
 time ; because as the king can only save 
 himself from the knight by a positive removal, 
 the sacrifice of the involved queen would be 
 inevitable. 
 
 15. Nor must the adversary be suffered to 
 direct the insidious power of the knight, on 
 any other two pieces of more importance than 
 himself; as the loss of one of them for the 
 knight, or for nothing, will necessarily follow. 
 
 16. When two pieces are attacked in such 
 a way, that one of them at least must be lost; 
 in deciding which to give up, do not think 
 
 so
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 45 
 
 so much on the difference in their worth, which 
 may be more than counterbalanced by other 
 circumstances, as on the particular effects 
 which the capture of this or that is likely ta 
 have. 
 
 17. Whenever you have two or three pawns 
 *o near the adversary's farthest rank, and so 
 well posted, that you are almost certain of 
 reaching it with one of them when you please ; 
 you may be the bolder with your capital pieces 
 and, where you would be otherwise in doubt 
 which to surrender, the less tenacious of retain- 
 ing one of them in preference to another less 
 capital. 
 
 18. Unless there should be no other way 
 of saving the king, or no other but what would 
 be attended with a greater disadvantage, never 
 cover him from check by placing a superior 
 piece in that manner, that a pawn of the ad- 
 versary, by being advanced a move, could take 
 it; lest the adversary, seizing the opportu- 
 nity, oblige you to a losing exchange. 
 
 19. When one of your party sustains an- 
 other, the defence may not be complete ; and if 
 the adversary can accumulate attacks on the 
 point, you must PROVIDE further support, 
 as many pawns or pieces as he can bring t<? 
 the assault. Defence is a confined service, and 
 
 pieces
 
 46 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 pieces should not be employed on it till wanted ; 
 therefore that arrangement which keeps them 
 ready for offence or defence is to be studied, 
 in preference to that which fortifies a post 
 which may never be attacked, through which 
 moves may be lost, along with an opportunity 
 for a decisive blow. 
 
 20. In order to have as powerful agents as 
 you can in play, let these that are stationed to 
 guard some other stationary ones, be of no 
 greater force than is necessary. 
 
 21. Where two of the adversaries are so 
 circumstanced that you can take either, consider- 
 ations similar to those in the 16th section should 
 influence your decision. 
 
 22. Where an adversary is so exposed that 
 you can take him when you please, do not pre- 
 cipitately snatch the prize: but see whether there 
 be not some danger to avert, or advantage to 
 seize, in another quarter, and let the victim 
 alone till it be effected. It may at length be 
 in your power to combine the piece that shall 
 move into his square in some extensive scheme ; 
 so that you may promote a distinct object, while 
 taking this piece. 
 
 23. Where an adverse pawn has advanced 
 to the square immediately befoi'e your king-, 
 do not take him, unless some consideration 
 
 superior
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 47 
 
 Superior to his value impels his removal from 
 the board ; as an adverse pawn before the king 
 is frequently found a safeguard. 
 
 24. Whenever you can anticipate by calcu- 
 lation, that the sacrifice of such and such a 
 piece, though it can yield no immediate re- 
 quital, will yet lead to such an arrangement, 
 as will enable you in the end to give the ad- 
 versary check-mate, true policy requires the 
 sacrifice, however great; but before you make 
 the surrender, be certain that no veiled resources 
 of the enemy escape your calculation. 
 
 25. Never let an over-eagerness of the victory 
 which a superiority may promise, lead you to 
 endanger its forfeiture by giving a stale : on 
 the contrary, till you can give check-mate with- 
 out a risk of miscarriage, always leave the ad- 
 versary ample room to move. 
 
 26. Whenever you have clearly the disad- 
 vantage of the game in other respects, and yet 
 happen to lae in a position that, bymanagement, 
 may be turned into a stale ; as an only resource* 
 endeavour to avail yourself of it. To do this, 
 the following case will serve as a general clue. 
 Your king is close pressed on all sides, and you 
 have only the queen and inferior piece left in 
 play take the first opportunity of playing, the 
 inferior piece so, that by its being either blocked 
 
 up
 
 48 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 up or lost, the king would be in a stale already 
 if you had not the queen. This done, with 
 the queen keep giving incessant* check to the 
 adversary's king, till at length, to avoid a check- 
 mate, the adversary is forced to capture her. 
 Your object will then be attained. 
 
 Note Sometimes a check-mate will speedily 
 terminate the game ; sometimes it will happen 
 that the pieces are nearly, and almost equally 
 played away, without any decision. To the 
 latter case, the six following sections are exclu- 
 sively adapted. 
 
 27. When the adversary's force is so much 
 diminished, that your king, if in any, is in no 
 immediate danger and your own force is so 
 much diminished, that you can make no effec- 
 tive attack without him the necessity and po- 
 licy of confining the king to defence only will 
 be superseded. <; 
 
 28. Among other uses to which he may then 
 be devoted, take every opportunity of putting 
 him in motion, where your doing so, will gain 
 
 _ 
 * The kings, in the course of play, may happen to be 
 
 circumstanced so nearly alike, as for the adversary's to be 
 liable to a stale at the same time with yours. This nice- point 
 will require the utmost skill in checking, and great caution 
 in taking a station, if yon are obliged to suspend checking 
 with the piece which you wish to los<;. 
 
 or
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 49 
 
 or preserve the position*, which it is of such 
 importance to have, that if the contest has been 
 otherwise equally conducted, your getting the 
 game will depend on that alone. 
 
 29. He may then, too, as circumstances vary, 
 be of service, either in protecting some pawns 
 of your own on their passage to queen ; or in 
 taking or harassing any adverse pawns, travers- 
 ing the board with the same design. 
 
 30. The note at the bottom of page 38, 
 respecting the rook, is a sufficient intimation 
 that the king may, in this stage of the game, 
 be employed in combination with another piece 
 in giving check to his antagonist. 
 
 From the same note it is to be inferred, that 
 if one party have only a king, and the other 
 
 * That is, such a relation of your king to the adverse 
 king, or the adverse pieces, as will enable you so to move, 
 or force the adversary so to move, as to give you the vic- 
 tory, or, if his strength be superior, allow you to make 
 a drawn game. The term the move has been hitherto em- 
 ployed to express this relation, but the impropriety of that 
 is manifest, when it is considered, that in various situations at 
 the close of a game, a player loses the party by being obliged 
 to move first. To explain this new technical term positions 
 by other words, it is the occupation of the master '.square , 
 or the command of a passage leading to it. See Sect. 31. 
 
 YOL. i. E ia
 
 50 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 in addition to the king have but one piece, 
 and that piece be a knight or a bishop, it 
 must be a drawn game ; and therefore that, 
 next to a queen or a rook, it is best for that 
 piece to be a pawn, from the possibility of 
 converting him into a piece of the first power. 
 This serves to introduce the following 
 
 PARTICULAR CASES. 
 
 SI. FIRST CASE. One player has the king at 
 the adversary's king's rook's third square, and 
 a single pawn, three squares from queening, at 
 the same rook's fourth. The other player has 
 the king at the same rook's first house. This 
 last player can make a drawn game, by refusing 
 to quit the rook's, which, for his object, is the 
 master square, farther than one remove. There- 
 fore in case the pawn be on the rook's file, the 
 player who is left with a single king, if he 
 cannot take the advancing pawn, has simply to 
 pre-occupy the rook's square to prevent it from 
 queening. 
 
 SECOND CASE. But, on any other than a 
 rook's file, the same pieces as far advanced in 
 the same order, would be a certain game for 
 the party with the pawn. The black king is at 
 
 the
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 51 
 
 the white king's third, a black pawn at the white 
 king's fourth; the white king is at his square. The 
 white king has the move ; he goes to the right 
 or left; the black king seizes the adverse queen's 
 second or king's bishop second, either of which 
 is, as to his object, a master square, as he 
 protects the pawn advancing to queen without 
 giving a stale. The black king in the same si- 
 tuation has the move: the difference is in the 
 process, not in the event: the black king 
 moves to the queen's or king's bishop's third; 
 (were his pawn on a knight's file, the direction 
 would not be indifferent ; he should take the 
 side of the board* ; ) the white king moves op- 
 posite ; the pawn is pushed; the king returns to 
 his square; the pawn reaches the adverse king's 
 second. The king, not in a stale, is compelled 
 to go into a square on the second rank, aban- 
 doning to the adverse king, the correspondent 
 square, which is a master-square. 
 
 * Otherwise the white king will go to the side of the 
 board, at the rook's second square ; and if the stronger 
 party, then, push and support his pawn, he will give a 
 stale, if, instead, he move the king to the bishop's second, 
 and immediately afterwards push the pawn, he will 
 equally give a stale ; if, instead, he move the king to the 
 bishop's second, and then move him to the knight's third, 
 he is only in his former position, and, to force the adver. 
 sary, must go to the side of the board. 
 
 E 2 Mis-
 
 52 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS CASES. It is extremely 
 difficult sometimes to pronounce, whether a 
 single remaining pawn can be queened. A player 
 who is uncertain whether he has the position, 
 or the command of a passage to the master- 
 square, need not lose it, if he seize the spirit 
 of the following rules ; and a marked attention 
 to the third case, after stated, will simplify the 
 necessary calculations. 
 
 The unattended king should advance to inter- 
 cept the pawn; but whenever the adverse king 
 is at the side of his pawn, he must suspend this 
 object to move opposite the adverse king, on the 
 third square from him, that is, with one be- 
 tween*, or if he cannot approach precisely 
 as close, opposite the king, or pawn, leaving 
 three squares between. If he can reach the 
 adversary's fourth square on the same file, 
 the pawn cannot be queened; because the 
 single king, by retiring before the pawn when it 
 is pushed upon him, and by moving opposite the 
 adverse king as often as he removes to the side 
 of his pawn, will, when forced back to the 
 
 * If the single king is already in this relation, and is 
 obliged to move, let him go in front of the pawn at the 
 same distance, gaining and keeping the other order as soon 
 as possible, or, at the bottom of the board, he will lose, as 
 already stated in the last variety of the second case. 
 
 bottom
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 53 
 
 bottom rank; make a drawn game, or win by a 
 stale. If the single king can reach his fourth 
 square of the file, he has the position in the fol- 
 lowing cases; if the pawn be not at its place, 
 which ever party first moves : if the pawn be 
 at its place, and its king in front, and it be 
 that party's turn to move : the contrary, the de- 
 fensive party at his fourth square, but obliged 
 to move when the adverse king stands at his third 
 square, in front of the pawn, is a lost game 
 to the single king, unless on a rook's file. And, 
 in short, when the pieces are in this relation, 
 except they are as far advanced as in the second 
 case, where the margin of the board produces 
 a peculiar result, the position is with the player 
 who moved last. 
 
 It follows, that the king with the pawn should 
 advance before it, endeavouring to occupy the 
 fourth square of the file ; or, if the pawn have 
 moved, to reach two squares in front; and he 
 should not move his pawn till obliged, for which 
 a reason will presently be stated. His great 
 preparatory object, is to get such a position as 
 is described in the second case ; and as that is 
 a certain step to victory, so the next described 
 is a certain step to that, or an equivalent. 
 
 THIRD CASE. A pawn at the second square 
 
 of anyjile, except the rook's ; his king at th^e fourth 
 
 * 3 of
 
 5-t INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 of the same jik ; the adverse king on the same 
 file, at the third square counted from his own side. 
 First, tlte unattended king moves. Toward the 
 side of the board directly ; the other king 
 obliques forward, a knight's move from his 
 antagonist ; the defensive king, rather than 
 resign the fourth square of the file, moves 
 opposite to the side of the adverse king; the 
 pawn gives check ; the king recedes ; the other 
 follows on the same rank; the weaker player 
 further recedes; the pawn one square; the 
 foiled king cannot prevent the relative position 
 described in the second case, or the first con- 
 sequence of that position. Replace the pieces, 
 and let the offensive party first move. The pawn 
 one square ; the king, if he refuses to retrograde, 
 gets into the same situation as when he had the 
 first move. The benefit of not having moved 
 the pawn is evident ; because it were unavailing 
 for one king, and a decided disadvantage for 
 the other, to be dislodged; and consuming a 
 move to play the pawn forces the weaker player. 
 Were the pieces in the same relation to each 
 other, but farther along the file, the opening left 
 for the pawn would be the same in its effects. 
 On the possibility of the stronger player's seiz- 
 ing a position similar to this, most calculations 
 for the six centre files will "turn. To count 
 
 forward
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 55 
 
 forward six moves for each king will at most 
 be necessary. 
 
 FOURTH CASE. A black pawn at his king's bishop's 
 second square ; the black king at his queen's rook's 
 third square ; the white king at his queen's rook's 
 fourth square. It is plain, that each king may 
 prevent the other from getting into the fourth 
 square of the pawn's file, which is the master po- 
 sition for either. The black king cannot prevent 
 the white king from reaching the fourth square 
 of the file from his own side ; nor, the white 
 king, the black, from reaching the third square 
 from his side, equally bordering on the con- 
 tested square; whichever first moves will, in 
 six moves, show that the other has the position. 
 Five moves will bring each into the relation 
 just mentioned. If the black then first move, 
 he must either recede, or move perpetually on 
 the same rank, or push the pawn : if the white 
 first move, he must resign to the black the po- 
 sition stated in the third case, or one similar. 
 
 FIFTH CASE. A black pawn at his king's 
 bishop's second square ; the black king at his queen's 
 rook's second square ; the white king at his queen's 
 rook's third square. The white has the position. 
 Suppose the black player first to move; His 
 king is carried to the next file; the white king 
 moves opposite to him at the distance of three 
 E 4 squares
 
 56 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 squares between, if the black king continuei on 
 the same rank or retrogrades, and opposite to 
 him, with one square between, if he advances. 
 Suppose the white king first to move ; He moves 
 into the next file, neither advancing, nor retrograd- 
 ing, by which his relation to the adverse king 
 and pawn, though collateral, is the same ai 
 recommended for the unattended king under 
 " Miscellaneous Cases." He must proceed thus, 
 if the other king should keep his rank ; and act 
 as if the other had moved first, should he retro- 
 grade or advance. The best course for the other 
 is along the rank toward the pawn, ready to 
 take advantage of a false move on your part. 
 
 SIXTH CASE. There is a distinct considera- 
 tion, the possibility of the pawn's being queen- 
 ed unsupported by his king. A black pawn at 
 his king's knight's second square ; the black king at 
 his queen's rook's second squaredthe white king at 
 his queen's rook's second square. Contrary to the 
 last case, the party moving first has the position. 
 Suppose the white to move. If he should go into 
 the rook's third, he would lose the position, 
 with respect to the pawn, and if into the 
 knight's second, he would lose it with respect to 
 the king, he therefore goes into the knight's 
 third ; and this case will in its consequences re- 
 semble the last. Suppose the black to move. He is 
 
 sure
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 57 
 
 sure of the game, whether he play his king or 
 his pawn ; if he take the knight's third, he is 
 in progress to the position described in the third 
 case. But it is far better to push the pawn two 
 squares, because it cannot be intercepted. 
 
 In calculating whether the pawn may pass 
 to queen unsupported, the difference between 
 its having moved or not, connected with its par- 
 ty having the move or not, is liable to occasion 
 some mistake. To avoid this, and to simplify 
 calculation, consider it, whether it have the 
 move or not, to be pushed as far as it can the 
 next move, and consider, the adverse king, if he 
 have the move, to be played two squares, and if 
 he have not the move, one square, on the way to 
 overtake or intercept the pawn. Let the square 
 where the pawn will stand after these anticipated 
 moves, form in idea the corner of a quadrangle* 
 bounded, in the direction of the file, by the bottom 
 of the board, and, in the direction of the rank, by 
 an equivalent space. If the king will stand on 
 any part of the quadrangle, the pawn cannot be 
 queened. 
 
 SEVENTH CASE. A black pawn at his king's 
 bishop's second; the black king at his queen's rook's 
 second; the white king at his queen's rook's second. 
 The stronger player has the move. He should 
 play his king to the knight's third, to keep the 
 
 position :
 
 58 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 position: he would abandon the position by 
 pushing the pawn, which cannot be queened 
 unsupported by its king-. At the second 
 move, the black should oblique into the 
 fourth rank. 
 
 32. Upon certain contingencies, the adver- 
 sary may have the king, a bishop, and a pawn, 
 when you have only the king, without being 
 able to beat you : which contingencies are these: 
 If the pawn be on a rook's file if you can get 
 into the square at your end of that file if this 
 square be of a colour different from that on 
 which the bishop moves all these concur- 
 ring, it is even possible for you to win by 
 a stale. 
 
 33. To conclude ; if you would have to ex- 
 pect something more than a mere exemption 
 from defeat, dependent on casualties of position, 
 let this rule, in connection with the others, be 
 attentively regarded. The changes and declen- 
 sions taking place in the number, value, and 
 situation of the pieces must be noted exactly ; 
 and no movement made till the consequences 
 are considered ; the board being always con- 
 templated before you take a move, as it will be, 
 when taken. This provident examination pro- 
 tects from false steps and oversights, and 
 enables you to penetrate the adversary's de- 
 signs,
 
 GENERAL MAXIMS. 59 
 
 signs, in order to prepare the proper counter- 
 play. Carry your calculations of the future 
 game from one move to two moves, from two 
 to three, and still further, as practice enables 
 you to do it without distraction. Vigilance 
 will almost supply experience; and, with ex- 
 perience, it will prevent you from giving any 
 advantage to the adversary, and from over- 
 looking any which he may give to you.
 
 61 
 
 THB 
 
 of 
 
 These are transferred to this place from the second 
 volume of Philidor. 
 
 THE Laws or Constitutions to regulate the 
 Game, are originally established, either to 
 prevent or decide contests; because, by de- 
 fining what is capable of diversified con- 
 struction, by determining points which, 
 without explanation, would be uncertain, 
 they prevent dispute. These statutes, found- 
 ed in reason, countenanced by custom, 
 confirmed by the practice of the best 
 players, and the approbation of illustrious 
 authors, may be reduced to the XVII. 
 following RULES, which the Society or 
 Club of Chess in ENGLAND have adopted 
 for their code. 
 
 LAWS
 
 62 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 LAWS OF CHESS. 
 
 I. 
 
 THE chess-board must be placed in such a 
 manner, that each player may have a white 
 square at his right hand. If a player perceive 
 the board to be improperly placed., before four 
 moves on each side have been played, he may 
 insist on recommencing the game. 
 
 II. 
 
 He that gives a piece is supposed to have the 
 move, unless it be agreed otherwise. In games 
 without odds, lots must be cast for the move, 
 which afterwards becomes alternate. 
 
 III. 
 
 If a pawn or piece have been forgotten at 
 the beginning of the game, it will be in the 
 adversary's choice, either to begin the game 
 afresh, or to proceed, permitting the piece 
 forgotten to be set in its place. 
 
 IV. 
 
 If it be agreed to give the advantage of a 
 piece, or a pawn, and it have been forgotten 
 
 at
 
 LAWS OP CHESS. 63 
 
 at the beginning of a game, it will be left to the 
 choice of him who has suffered by such a mistake, 
 either to proceed, or to recommence. 
 
 V. 
 
 A piece once touched must be played, unless 
 it be said, in touching it, J'adoube : but if a piece 
 be displaced or overturned by accident, the player 
 in whose set it is will be allowed to restore it to 
 its place. 
 
 VI. 
 
 If you touch one of your adversary's pieces 
 without saying J'adoube, he has a right to 
 oblige you to take it ; and in case you touch a 
 piece not prizable, you, who have touched it, 
 must play your king if you can. 
 
 VII. 
 
 When one has dismissed a piece from his 
 hand, he cannot take it again to play it to 
 another place ; but so long as he keeps his 
 hold of it, he is at liberty to play it where he 
 pleases. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 A player making a false move, must play 
 his king, as in rule VI.; but no false move 
 can be recalled after the adversary's succeeding 
 
 move:
 
 64 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 move : so if the irregular move be not revoked 
 in time, the position taken must remain as if 
 it had been just. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Every pawn which has reached the eighth 
 or last square of the chess-board, is entitled 
 to make a queen, or any other piece that shall be 
 thought proper ; and this, even when all the pieces 
 remain on the chess-board*. 
 
 X. 
 
 Any pawn has the privilege of advancing 
 two squares at its first move : but, in this 
 case, it may, in passing, be taken by any 
 pawn which might have taken it if it had 
 been pushed but one move*. 
 
 XI. 
 
 The king when he castles, cannot in his 
 
 flight 
 
 * So much of this rule as encroaches on the uniform 
 order of the set was afterwards rescinded by Philidor. Where 
 two antagonists can agree that any rule is unreasonable or 
 inconvenient, they may reject or qualify it in respect to their 
 own play. With regard to the desirable object of a general 
 concurrence, the experienced reader is invited to consult the 
 APPENDIX, end of vol. ii. art; Supernumerary Queens. 
 
 t One square would be more correct: but the language 
 of this tenth rule is retained verbatim ; because the reason- 
 ing on which it rests may partly depend on this mode of 
 speaking. The rule is vindicated in the APPENDIX.
 
 LAWS OF CHESS. 65 
 
 flight exceed two squares, that is, the rook 
 with which he castles must take the square 
 next to the original square of the king; and 
 the latter, leaping over, must be posted close 
 on the other side of the rook *. 
 
 XII. 
 
 The king cannot castle when in check, 
 nor after having been moved, nor if in 
 passing he was exposed to a check, nor with 
 a rook which has been removed from its 
 place: and he that castles when he should 
 not, must play his rook touched, or his 
 king, at his own choice. 
 
 xni. 
 
 If a player give check without warning, 
 the adversary will not be bound to ward it 
 off; and he may consequently play as if such 
 check did not exist: but if the former, in 
 playing the next move, were to say, Check, 
 each must then retract his last move, as being 
 false, and he that is under check is to obviate 
 jt in the prescribed form. 
 
 * The old way of castling in several countries, and it 
 still subsists in some, was to leave to the player's disposal, 
 all the interval between the king and the rook, along with 
 the squares first assigned them. 
 
 VOL. I. F XIV. If
 
 66 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 If the adversary warn you of a check, with- 
 out however giving it, and you in conse- 
 quence touch, or move, either your king, or 
 any other piece, you will then be allowed 
 to retract, so long as your adversary has not 
 completed his next move. 
 
 XV. 
 
 If any one touch a piece which he cannot 
 play without exposing his king to check, he 
 must then play his king ; and if his king 
 cannot be played, the mistake; entails no 
 penalty. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 When one has nothing else to play, and 
 his king being out of check, cannot stir 
 without coming to a check, then the game is 
 stale-mate. In England, he whose king is 
 stale-mate wins the game*; but in France, 
 
 and 
 
 * The good sense for which the English nation have credit 
 is conspicuous in this rule : The player giving the stale-mate, 
 has put the adversary into a position DIRECTLY THE REVERSE 
 of check-mate. Mr. Sarratt, nevertheless, wishes to import 
 the neutralizing law, which makes a stale-mate a drawn 
 game. As an unanswerable objection to the British prin- 
 ciple, he says that if it be established, every player might 
 have a two-fold object in view, " that of check-mating his 
 
 " adversary,
 
 LAWS OP CHESS. 67 
 
 and several other countries, the stale-mate is a 
 drawn game. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 At all conclusions of parties, when a player 
 seems not to know how to give the difficult 
 mates, as that of a knight and a bishop 
 against the king, that of a rook and a bishop 
 against a rook, &c. at the adversary's request, 
 fifty moves on each side must be appointed 
 for the end of the game: these being accom- 
 plished without a mate, it will be a drawn 
 game. 
 
 f ( adversary, or that of compelling his adversary to stale. 
 " mate him." But, according to his own rule, in a few 
 situations which he has mixed with some masterly ones 
 adopted by him, the player may have a threefold object in 
 view: 1. To CHECK.MATE THE ADVERSARY; 2. Having failed 
 with loss, to GET INTO A STALE; 3. Foiled in this, too, to 
 GIVE A STALE. It is extending indulgence to an unskilful or 
 inadvertent mode qf approach, to make it indifferent to the 
 player which of the two last happens ; and it is encouraging 
 that party who CAN avoid it, to produce that relation of the 
 adverse pieces which is an opprobrium to the board. Con- 
 ceive the white king to be at the adverse rook's square, a 
 white pawn at the same rook's second ; the black king at 
 his bishop's square : The white has to move. The black king 
 might have avoided giving such a stale. mate : Shall we grant 
 him indemnity for marring the game ? 
 
 F 2 The
 
 68 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 The EDITOR invites the experienced reader'* 
 particular attention to the 9th rule; as the 
 point intended to be established by it seems open 
 to discussion. Vide APPENDIX at the end of 
 Vol. II.
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 WHOEVER has marked the experiments of 
 a pupil in Chess, must have observed a propen- 
 sity to a variety of moves, which, while appear- 
 ing to open a field teeming with advantage, 
 lead to disastrous results. Some of these are 
 interspersed in the following examples, and their 
 adverse consequences traced to their source. 
 But, although the object of making these 
 games serviceable to the learner is chiefly re- 
 garded in their composition, they contain, it is 
 hoped, some things which the proficient may 
 find novel and well founded. 
 
 Let us now attend the pupil at the board, and 
 conduct him through such evolutions as may fit 
 him to appreciate and enjoy the enterprise and 
 spirit of CUNNINGHAM, the brilliant prompt- 
 ness at resource of SALVIO, and the compre- 
 hension and foresight of PNILIDOR.
 
 70 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 lirjst 
 
 1. 
 
 W. KING'S pawn 2 squares (a). 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. bishop to the Q. bishop's 4th 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square (c). 
 
 3. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B* The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 (a) To place the pawns in the centre, and gain room for 
 the action of the pieces, so as not to expose the king, should 
 be the first pursuit. This way of opening, adopted oftener 
 than any other, consults these different intentions. 
 
 (6) The queen's pawn should not be moved a square, to 
 support the king's pawn, without necessity, for two reasons. 
 You obstruct your bishop by it, and if the adversary after, 
 wards oblige you to urge it another square^ you lose a move, 
 as using two efforts for what may be done at once. It is 
 proper, therefore, in regular parties, to bring out the 
 king's bishop at this moment, and to keep the queen's pawn 
 in reserve. 
 
 (c) The adversary moves this^ is a prelude to changing 
 his queen's pawn with your king's pawn, in order to have 
 two pawns in the centre. PHILIDOR [Analysis, 4th Party] 
 dissuades from this attempt s6 early, because the advance of 
 the queen's pawn will disconcert it. 
 
 4> W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 71 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares (rf). 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square (e). 
 
 6. 
 W. The bishop takes the K. b. pawn, and gives 
 
 check (/). 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 7. 
 W. The queen gives check at the adverse 
 
 queen's 4th (g). 
 B. The king at his square. 
 
 8. W. 
 
 (rf) This is the first step of a deviation which promises 
 speedy trophies, and yet conducts to failure. The advance 
 of the knight's pawn is seldom beneficial at the beginning 
 of the game ; and it should be followed by a preparation to 
 secure the rook. 
 
 (e) This is a perseverance in a course of annoyance begun 
 too hastily. 
 
 (/) You might have offered check-mate, by placing your 
 queen at his queen's 3d, but then he would have pushed his 
 queen's bishop's pawn upon your bishop. You would have 
 obtained, what you will now obtain, a rook and a pawn 
 for a bishop, with this difference, that his king would have 
 retained the privilege of castling, and, with it, facilities to 
 attack your queen which are now abridged. 
 
 () That arrangement of pieces which allows you, by 
 F 4 taking
 
 72 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The queen takes the rook. 
 B. Q. knight at his Q. bishop's 3d (/*). 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares (i). 
 B. The queen gives check at her rook's 4th 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The Q. kn. interposes at the bishop's 3d(/) 
 B. K. knight to the king's 2d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The bishop to the adverse K. knight's 4th, 
 B. The king to his queen's square*. 
 
 taking a pawn with a bishop, to draw the adverse king 
 where you can check him, and at the moment attack a piece, 
 should be made where it can. 
 
 (h) He designs to force your queen, and it will require 
 unremitting address to extricate her. 
 
 (i) You propose, by this, to establish a communication 
 between your queen and rook. 
 
 (k) He gains a move by the check, and the ambosh on 
 the rook prevents you from taking the pawn. 
 
 (1) If the Q. bishop's pawn covers, the game is won with 
 difficulty, and only by the sacrifice of a piece j and the most 
 cautious player may lose it, unless he be conversant with 
 the resources of every successive situation. 
 
 * The first variation turns on a different move, by which 
 the black loses sooner. 
 
 12. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 73 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The king castles*. 
 
 B. Q. knight to adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse queen's 4th. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The Q. rook takes the knight. 
 B. The pawn takes the knight (w). 
 
 16. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn I square. 
 B. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its Q. bishop's 4th (n). 
 B. Q. bishop to Q. rook's 3d. 
 
 * The Principal Buck-game, p. 85, shews, that if the 
 king's knight be here brought out, you have eventually a 
 stronger game : but the queen is not so soon liberated, and 
 the intermediate course is difficult to conduct. 
 
 (wi) The other pawn is prevented from taking the rook, 
 by the ambuscade on the queen. 
 
 () To prevent his queen from coming to your queen's 
 knight's fourth, before you have taken the first of the 
 double pawns; had his queen occupied her bishop's 2d, 
 your rook must have retired to its queen's square. 
 
 VOL. I. * F 5 18. W.
 
 74 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The Q. rook takes the Q. kn. pawn (o). 
 B. The queen to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. Q. bishop to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The queen to her 3d. 
 B. K. bishop to his 3d (p). 
 
 21. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. bishop to his 3d. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. K. knight to the king's 2d (g). 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. K. rook to its Q. rook's square. 
 B. The Q. b. pawn takes the pawn (r). 
 
 (o) Were your queen to give check, and take his rook, 
 he might restore his game. 
 
 (p) He neglects your pawn, to secure the difference be. 
 tween a rook and a bishop. 
 
 (<?) If he should take your Q. r. pawn, which the last 
 move of his bishop attacks, you will recover more than an 
 equivalent, by playing your K. rook to the Q. rook's square. 
 
 (/) Were he longer to delay exchanging, your knight at 
 (he queen's 4th would prevent him from obtaining a rook for 
 a bishop. 
 
 24. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The knight takes the bishop. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The rook to his queen's square. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's square. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The queen to her 4th (s). 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The rook takes the queen. 
 B. Q. r. pawn 2 squares (t). 
 
 29. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square, 
 B. The pawn takes it. 
 
 (s) Equal in pieces, but superior in pawns, you offer to 
 exchange queens, which he cannot refuse, without allowing 
 yon more than a comparative increase of strength. 
 
 (t) Had he not pushed this pawn two squares, you would 
 have pushed the counter pawn a square, in order to seat your 
 inactive pawns on black squares, where they are unassailable 
 by the bishop. 
 
 31. W.
 
 76 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook to his K. knight's square. 
 
 32, 
 
 W. The rook to his queen's 2d. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The rook to his K. bishop's 2d. 
 B. K. r. pawn advances. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king to his queen's square. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 2d (u). 
 B. K. r. pawn to adverse rook's 3d. 
 
 36. W. 
 
 (u) Or you may play as below : 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. rook's 3d. 
 B. K. r. pawn to adverse rook's 3d. 
 
 36. 
 
 W. Q. kn. p. 1 square. 
 B. The pawn, taking it, checks. 
 
 37, 
 
 W. The king takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook to adverse K. knight's 2d. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 39. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 77 
 
 36. 
 
 W. K. knight to his 3d. 
 
 B. The rook takes the knight (x). 
 
 37. W. 
 
 (x) Should his bishop, instead, first occupy your K. 
 knight's 2d, your rook must go to its queen's 2d. 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The knight to his K. 2d. 
 B. The king to his 2d. 
 
 40 and 41. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 4th. 
 
 42. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn to adverse rook's 2d. 
 B. The pawn queens. 
 
 43. 
 
 W. The knight takes the queen. 
 B. The king takes the pawn in K. bishop's file. 
 
 44. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 2d, checking. 
 B. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 45. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 46. 
 
 W. The knight to his queen's 4th. 
 B. The bishop to adverse Q. rook's square. 
 
 47 and 48. 
 
 W. The king to the adverse queen's 3d. 
 B. The king to his rook's 4th. 
 
 49. W.
 
 78 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 37. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 B. The bishop to the adverse K. knight's 2d. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The rook to the king's 2d. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The rook to the king's square. 
 B. The pawn is queened. 
 
 40, 
 
 W. The rook takes the queen. 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The king to the Q. rook's 3d 
 B. The king to his 2d. 
 
 49. 
 
 W. The king takes the pawn. 
 B. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 50 and 51. 
 
 W. The king to the adverse Q. knight's square. 
 B. The king to his knight's 4th ; the bishop to his queen's 
 
 4th. 
 
 52. 
 
 W. The knight to the adverse king's 3d, checking. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 53. 
 W. The knight tp the adverse queen's square. 
 
 B. The king to his 2d. 
 
 54. 
 W. The knight to the adrerse Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 42. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 79 
 
 42. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. r. pawn, taking it, checks. 
 
 43, 
 
 W. The king takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to his 3d (y). 
 
 44. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 4th. 
 
 45. 
 
 W. The king to the adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The king to the adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 46. 
 
 W. The king to the adverse queen's 3d. 
 B. The bishop to his 3d. 
 
 47. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The king takes the pawn in the K. knight's 
 file. 
 
 48, 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The pawn takes it (z). 
 
 (y) If he push his queen's pawn two squares at this move, 
 play your king to his queen's bishop's fourth : should he 
 then advance it, you will gain a pawn ; or should he play 
 one of his pieces, you can exclude hjs bishop's action from 
 your Q. rook's square ? by seating your king at the queen's 
 4th. 
 
 (z) Or, it would queen in two mores. 
 
 49. W
 
 80 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 49. 
 
 W. The king takes the bishop. 
 B. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 50. 
 W. The remaining pawn queens in two moves. 
 
 FIRST
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 81 
 
 VARIATION 
 
 BY WHICH THE GAME IS LOST SOONER ; 
 
 On the Eleventh Move of the Black, pa. 72. 
 11. 
 
 w. 
 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d *. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. Q. bishop to the Q. rook's 3d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The king castles with his rook. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 * In the preceding example, the course of the BLACK, 
 after the fifth move, is given as equal to any train of steps 
 that could be resorted to : but this move is ill adapted 
 to retrieve an inferior situation; although, should the 
 white Q. b. pawn have covered, this position of the 
 king, taken at a proper stage, renders the escape of the 
 white queen extremely difficult. See the Secondary 
 Back Game. 
 
 VOL. I. G 14. W.
 
 H2 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. knight to adverse knight's 4th. 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 13- 
 
 W. The queen to adverse Q. bishop's square. 
 B- K_. ka pawn 1 square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. K. TOOK to the queen's square. 
 B. Q. pawn I square. 
 
 19. 
 .W. K. knight to the adverse K. knight's 
 
 4th. 
 B. Q. knight to the queen's square. 
 
 ao. 
 
 W. The K. rook takes the pawn. 
 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 
 21 
 
 At* 
 
 W. The Q. rook gives check at its qtteen's 
 
 square. 
 R. The king to his 4th. 
 
 22. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 83 
 
 22. 
 W. The rook to the adverse queen's 4th, 
 
 checking. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 23. 
 W. The queen takes the knight, and gives 
 
 check. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 24. 
 W. The rook to the adverse queen's 2d, 
 
 checking. 
 B. The queen takes the rook. 
 
 25. 
 W. The queen takes the queen, and gives 
 
 check. 
 B. The king to his rook's 3d. 
 
 26. 
 W. The knight to the adverse bishop's 2d, 
 
 checking. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The knight takes the rook. 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The queen to the adverse K. bishop's 2d. 
 B. The bishop to K. rook's 3d. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. When this pawn be within 
 ft 2 a move
 
 84; INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 a move of becoming a rook, the queen should 
 check at the adverse K. bishop's square. Or 
 should the black bishop previously go to the 
 K. knight's 2d, the queen will mate in two 
 moves. 
 
 PRINCIPAL
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 85 
 
 PRINCIPAL BACK GAME; 
 
 On the Twelfth Move of the White., pa. 73. 
 
 12. 
 
 W, K. knight to K. bishop's 3d*. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The king castles on his own side. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. Q. knight to adverse knight's 4th. 
 B. The rook to its K. bishop's squar e . 
 
 * Although your queen is longer confined, by thus getting 
 out the pieces, and castling on the king's side, yet if you avoid 
 any error in passing through the intricacies which may arise 
 about the 20th move, you win more expeditiously than by 
 the first mode. That abounds with situations more in. 
 structive to the beginner : this is the best for actual play : 
 both sufficiently expose the inherent weakness of the black 
 game. 
 
 G 3 16. W
 
 86 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. K. rook to its queen's square. 
 
 B The queen to her knight's 3d (a). 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K. knight to queen's 2d. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The K. knight takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn, and gives check. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The king to his rook's square. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 4th (6). 
 
 20. W. 
 
 (a) To prevent the adverse queen from taking the knight. 
 
 (b) She might attack the K. knight, by going to your 
 king's 2d. She would defend her own knight; because, 
 were your queen to take the latter apparently exposed, the 
 black rook by a check would force away that white rook 
 which has a, masked attack. You should then omit the 20th 
 move, and play as at the present 21st and 22d moves, 
 moving, however, the K. knight first. Then 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The knight to the adverse knight's 4th, checking. 
 B. The king returns to his queen's square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The knight takes the Q. r. pawn. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 2t. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 87 
 
 20. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. Q. knight to the adverse Q. 3d. 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The knight takes the bishop. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The knight takes the bishop. 
 B. The rook takes the knight. 
 
 2*. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook to the Q. knight's square. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. Q. rook to adverse Q. 4th. 
 B. The queen to the adverse king's 3d. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The queen to her 3d. 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The queen takes the knight. 
 B. The queen to her rook's 3d. She is compelled, by the 
 
 incommodious situation of her king, to offer this ex. 
 
 change; which allows the white to win, by a plain 
 
 course. 
 
 G 4 27. W.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 27. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 28. 
 
 AV. The pawn in Q. file 1 square. 
 B. The knight to his king's 2d. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. K. rook to the adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 30. 
 
 AV. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The rook to the Q. rook's square. 
 
 31. 
 
 AV. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 3d. 
 
 32. " 
 
 W. The K. rook to adverse Q. rook's 4th. 
 B. The knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The K. rook to its Q. rook's 4th. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. K- pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 35. 
 
 AV. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn in Q. file. 
 
 36. AV.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 89 
 
 36. 
 
 W. The K. rook to the adverse Q. rook's 4th x 
 
 giving check. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 37. 
 W. The K. rook to the adverse Q. rook's 3d, 
 
 giving check. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The K. rook to the adverse Q. 3d. 
 B. The knight takes the Q. kn. pawn (c), 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The Q. rook to its Q. knight's square. 
 B. The knight to its Q. bishop's 4th (d). 
 
 40. 
 W. The Q. rook takes the pawn, giving 
 
 check. 
 B. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 (c) If he take your Q. r. pawn, check with the K. rook, 
 by which you will gain his rook for the pawn. 
 
 (rf) If his rook take your pawn, you check with your 
 K. rook, and exchange before you take his knight ; other- 
 wise you lose the game, by a smothered mate. 
 
 41. W.
 
 90 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The K. rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The knight to his 2d. 
 
 42. 
 
 W. The K. rook to the adverse Q. 2d, and the 
 whites easily win. 
 
 SECONDARY
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 
 
 
 
 SECONDARY BACK-GAME. 
 
 On the Tenth Move of the White, pa. 72. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn interposes*. 
 B. K. knight to his king's 2d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The queen to her rook's 3d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 * After this move, the black can compel you to sacri- 
 fice a piece to save the queen, and can place you in situa- 
 tions in which a slight mistake would induce final defeat : 
 but if the best play be used on both sides ? he can neither 
 win nor draw the game. 
 
 15. W. 
 
 ,
 
 92 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. K. rook to its 3d. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to Q. knight's 2d (e). 
 
 16. 
 W. The K. ktiight gives check, at the adverse 
 
 king's 4th. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 17. 
 W. The queen to the adverse Q. knight's 
 
 square. 
 B. Q. knight returns to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen to the adverse queen's 3d. 
 B. Q. knight to his rook's 4th. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The queen takes the Q. pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to his square. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The queen to the adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 
 () If the black Q. pawn be pushed one square, the 
 bishop must take it, and if two squares the king's pawn 
 must take it. 
 
 22. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 93 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 B. Q. knight to the adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. knight to his 3d (/). 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to his knight's square. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse Q. bishop's 2d. 
 B. Q. knight to the Q. bishop's square*. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. First pawn in Q. knight's file 1 square. 
 B. K. knight to the Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. rook's square. 
 B. Q. knight to the king's 2d. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The pawn to adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. The king to his rook's 2d. 
 
 (f) Should he come to your knight's 2d, your king at 
 the queen's 2d will confine him. 
 
 * This position is subjoined in a diagram, to facilitate 
 experiments on the play of the black. 
 
 29. W.
 
 94 INTRODUCTION TO CHLSS. 
 
 W. The pawn is queened. 
 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 B. The knight to the Q,. bishop's 3d. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The rook to the adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. The bishop to the king's 2d. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The Q. b. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 33. 
 W. The rook to the adverse Q,. knight's 
 
 square (g). 
 B. The rook takes the rook (h). 
 
 34. W. 
 
 (gj You negotiate an exchange of rooks, because to 
 allow his rook the open Q. rook's file would be dangerous. 
 Had he, in the preceding move, however, taken with the 
 pawn, instead of the knight, you might have resigned that 
 file to the rook ; and, while guarding against the approach 
 of his knight to your king, you would have availed your- 
 self of it to lodge your Bishop at the adverse king's fourth ; 
 a position in which, as his rook could not in time move 
 to his K. knight's square, his most valuable piece must 
 fall to your rook, first giving and then discovering check. 
 
 (h) He might cover with his bishop, and wait to sur- 
 
 prize
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 95 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the rook. 
 
 B. The knight gives check at adverse Q. 3d. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's square. 
 B. The knight to adverse Q. bishop's square. 
 
 36. 
 
 W. The knight to his queen's 2d. 
 B. The king to his knight's square (i). 
 
 37. W. 
 
 prize your rook by checking your king with his bishop : 
 but he would have first to remove your rook from a black 
 square, and by lost moves, which you would easily coun- 
 teract, make his situation worse. 
 
 (i) In the play below, the FIRST move of the black is 
 extremely faulty : the pawn, if pushed, should be pushed 
 two squares ; but the black K. knight's 4th square is left 
 vacant, for the bishop to attack the white knight. 
 
 36. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 37. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The bishop" to his king's knight's 4th. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 39. W.
 
 96 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 37- 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The knight to adverse queen's 3d. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The king to his 2d. 
 B. The knight to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 39. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The knight to Q. rook's 3d. 
 
 ' 40. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse queen's 3d. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 41. W. 
 
 39. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The bishop is compelled to return to his knight's 4th. 
 
 40. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse Q. 3d. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 41. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 42. 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop; and can win. 
 
 Or, 41. 
 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 42. W. The pawn takes 
 the pawn, checking. B. The king to his square. 
 43. W. Pawn in K. kn. file 1 square. One of the 
 pawns can be queened for the loss of the other.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. VI 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 42. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. The king to his 3d square. 
 
 43. 
 
 W. The king to his queen's 3d. 
 B. The knight (queen's) to his square. 
 
 44. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The king to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 45. 
 
 W. The knight takes the pawn. 
 B. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 46. 
 
 W. The pawn in Q. file 1 square. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 47. 
 
 W. The knight takes the knight> and the single 
 pawn may be easily queened. 
 
 VOL. i. H POSITION
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 POSITION 
 
 In the Secondary Back-Game, pa. 93. 
 
 
 TJie Black to wore. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. - - - 
 
 B. K-. knight to Q. bishop's square. 
 
 2C. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 
 
 99 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The rook to the adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. Q. knight to the queen's 2d. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The bishop to the adverse Q. square. 
 B. Q. knight to the K. bishop's 3d. 
 
 28. 
 
 \V. The rook to the adverse Q. knight's square. 
 B. K. knight to the queen's 3d. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The bishop to the adverse king's 2d. 
 B. The K. knight takes the first pawn in Q. 
 knight's file (#). 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The rook takes the bishop, checking* 
 B. The king to his rook's 2d. 
 
 31, 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook., checking, 
 B The king takes the rook. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 (&) This is the most dangerous pawn to the black; and 
 he must lose a piece. 
 
 S3. W.
 
 100 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. -The Q. b. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The knie-ht to the queen's 2d. 
 B. The knight to the adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 36. 
 
 W The king to his bishop's 2d ; and can win 
 by a plain course. 
 
 VARIATION
 
 S-IRST ESSAY. 
 
 VARIATION 
 
 ON THE SECONDARY BACK-GAME, 
 At the Eleventh Move of the Black, pa. 91 . 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d*. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d (/). 
 B. The queen to her knight's 3d (m). 
 
 13. W. 
 
 * This equally compels the White to sacrifice a piece, 
 yet leaves the Black unable to recover the game. The 
 Principal Back-Game is already pointed out as the best 
 practical pattern : but all these variations contain situations 
 calculated to improve the learner, the more so because the 
 play at the end of each party is carried farther than a pro- 
 ficient would desire. 
 
 (/) You bring out this to co-operate with the bishop in 
 displacing his knight. 
 
 (m} To enable him to move his bishop upon your queen. 
 In the preceding example the eleventh and twelfth moves 
 of the black differ from these. 
 
 H3
 
 102 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to his knight's 2d. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The knight gives check at adverse king's 4th. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn (n). 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The rook takes the queen (o) . 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 17- 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight; 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 18* 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse Q. bishop's 2d (p). 
 B. The knight to his Q. bishop's square (q). 
 
 19- W. 
 
 (n) If your bishop take the knight, you lose the game. 
 
 (o) The exchanges from the 14th to the 17th move 
 leave the adversary a piece more than you; but in pos- 
 sessing a passed pawn and pieces better situated, you have 
 the teal superiority. 
 
 (p) Had you taken the pawn with the rook, the adverse 
 
 king
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 
 
 103 
 
 19. 
 
 W. Q. rook to the adverse Q. rook's square. 
 B. K. bishop to his king's 2d (;). 
 
 20. 
 W. Q. rook to the adverse Q. knight's square 
 
 (*,) 
 B. K. rook to its king's square (/). 
 
 king by coming in contact with your rook and bishop would 
 have secured one of them ; and had you castled, the adverse 
 bishop, menacing two points at your queen's 3d, would 
 have forced you either to surrender the passed pawn gratis, 
 or to resign a rook for a bishop. Your bishop in this po- 
 sition is ready to support your pawn in two of its stages. 
 
 (qr) The adversary's pieces confine one another, and 
 it is partly to remedy this, and partly to intercept your 
 pawn, that the knight moves. His attack on your rook 
 is purely incidental. 
 
 (r) That his rook may protect the knight. 
 
 (s) Still you must not castle; and if you venture the 
 march of the pawn, his Q. bishop will assail your Q. rook 
 and your K. knight's pawn. To seat your rook out of 
 the range of his bishop is the only proper move. 
 
 (f) His rook was in an uneasy situation ; now the 
 knight, on vaulting out, will not expose it to capture without 
 equivalent. 
 
 H 
 
 21.
 
 104 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The king castles (u). 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's bishop's 4th. 
 
 99 
 
 . 
 
 W. K. rook to its king's square (.r). 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 23. 
 W. The first pawn in the knight's file, "1 
 
 square. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight (y ) . 
 B. K. bishop to his K. knight's 4th (2). 
 
 () Had you pushed the pawn, he might have gained the 
 ascendancy by discovering check. 
 
 (#) Your pawn, were it pushed now, would cost him a 
 piece ; but this momentary delay will not allow him to 
 amend his situation, and you improve yours by placing the 
 rook here. 
 
 (y~) With five pawns to four, and the difference between 
 a rook and a bishop, the game is virtually decided : but 
 as an antagonist is at liberty to try every expedient, to 
 protract and palliate, in expectation of your committing 
 an oversight, it may not be altogether useless to continue 
 the notation of the moves, though probably PHILIDOR would 
 close it here. Unless a player is already accomplished, he 
 will require particular instructions, for conducting the 
 conclusions of parties, as well as the openings. 
 
 25. W,
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 105 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The rook to the adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 B. K. bishop to the adverse Q. bishop's 
 square (aa). 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d (&&). 
 
 29. 
 
 W. K. rook to the adverse king's 4th (cc). 
 B. The king to his queen's 2d. 
 
 SO. W. 
 
 (z) Had he let you seat your rook at his Q. knight's 2(1, 
 before he offered this exchange, he would have lost a piece. 
 
 (aa) Whatever course he adopts, he must lose a pawn. 
 
 (bb) You want a move in order to save your pawn ; ho, 
 therefore, very properly attacks your rook, which might 
 occasion you to lose a move. 
 
 (cc) When you have a rook and a bishop against two 
 bishops, the best way to prevent the rook from being dis- 
 lodged or embarrassed, is to play it in the field of your 
 own bishop, this is one reason for the present step; another
 
 106 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The bishop to the adverse Q. rook's 
 
 4th. 
 B. The king to his queen's 3d. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square (dd). 
 
 32. 
 W. The bishop gives check at his queen's 
 
 knight's 4th. 
 B. The king to his queen's 2d. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's d. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 3d (ee). 
 B. K. bishop to the adverse Q. bishop's square. 
 
 is, by attacking his bishop to gain a move ; a third, to 
 abridge the area in which his king moves, and Lcep on his 
 ground an escort for your pawns. 
 
 (dd) Reduced to the defensive, he obstructs, for the 
 present, the progress of your pawn on this wing, as he 
 does of the other. 
 
 (ee) If you were to attempt to force his bishop with 
 your king, he would keep you from passing, by checking 
 with his queen's bishop, and you would lose a move. 
 
 35. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 107 
 
 35. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares (ff). 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 36. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. bishop to his K. knight's square (gg) 
 
 37. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. K. bishop to the adverse K. bishop's 
 4th. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The rook gives check at the adverse 
 kind's 2d. 
 
 O 
 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 39. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square (hh}. 
 B. The Q. bishop takes the K. b. pawn. 
 
 (Jf) If you were to attempt to force his bishop by plac- 
 ing your rook at your king's 2d, he would bring his queen's 
 bishop to your queen's knight's 3d, and you would lose a 
 move. 
 
 (gg) If he had stopped at the bishop's 2d, you might 
 have taken him by giving check. 
 
 (hh) If you were to use any effort to defend the rook's 
 pawn, your king would be liable to assault from Ijoth his 
 bishops, and you would lose a number of moves. 
 
 40. W.
 
 108 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 40. 
 
 W. The rook takes the bishop. 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The rook gives check at the adverse K. bi- 
 shop's 3d. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 42. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The bishop to the adverse K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 43. 
 
 W. The king to his 4th square (M). 
 B. The king to the adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 44. 
 W. The rook gives check at the adverse Q. 
 
 bishop's 3d. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 4th (M). 
 
 (i) You may win the game without queening either of 
 your pawns. Even with a decisive superiority, it requires 
 a familiar acquaintance with the board to take those sta- 
 tions, which will bring the game to a conclusion without 
 any tedium. 
 
 (fc/c) In any other course he could take, the result would 
 equally correspond with the power of your pieces. 
 
 45. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 109 
 
 45. 
 
 W. The king to the adverse queen's 4th. 
 B. The bishop to the adverse king's 3d. 
 
 46. 
 
 W. The bishop to the adverse king's 2d. 
 B. The king to his Q. rook's 4th. 
 
 47. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The bishop to his Q. knight's 3d. 
 
 48. 
 W. The bishop gives check at his Q. knight'* 
 
 4th. 
 B. The king to the adverse rook's 4th. 
 
 49. 
 W. The bishop to the adverse Q. bishop's 
 
 4th (//). 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 50. 
 W. The rook gives checkmate. 
 
 (II) Were you to take the bishop, he would win by a 
 stale. This example will convey a picture of the situation 
 called a stale, should the description at the beginning of the 
 book not be sufficiently clear. 
 
 SUP-
 
 110 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 SUPPLEMENT. 
 
 On the Twenty -second Move of t lie Black, p. 104. 
 POSITION OF THE PIECES. 
 
 : 
 
 22 
 B. Q. knight to the Q. rook's 2d. 
 
 23. 
 
 \V. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The kins: takes the rook. 
 
 24. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. Ill 
 
 24. 
 
 W. First pawn in Q. kn. file 1 square. 
 B. The knight to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. First pawn in Q. kn. file 1 square. 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares (a). 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to the adverse queen's 3d (&). 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The rook to his Q. bishop's square. 
 B, Q. bishop to his Q. rook's 3d. 
 
 () You may at once gain a knight for the pawn by 
 pushing it ; or you may have a bishop and pawn for the 
 adventurer, by placing your bishop at his queen's 3d. The 
 situation authorises you to forego each of those advantages, 
 and reach at greater. 
 
 () Neither his knight nor bishop can take your rear 
 pawn, because one would discover check, and the other 
 would let your pawn in the van make a queen. His 
 bishop is placed here to prevent the second of your double 
 pawns from dislodging his knight, and to be in readiness 
 to attack the first. 
 
 29. W.
 
 112 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn (c). 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The rook to the adverse Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. bishop to his square. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. knight's square. 
 B. The king to his queen's 2d. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The bishop to his K. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's square (d). 
 B. K. bishop to his queen's square (e). 
 
 (c) He has lost nothing by pushing his queen's pawn, 
 because if that pawn was at its original square, he must 
 take the pawn on the eve of queening, and let the rook 
 escape. 
 
 (d) If you were to suffer his pawn to advance without 
 guarding against it, the event might be disastrous, and you 
 cannot have a better opportunity for bringing out your 
 king. 
 
 (e) His king cannot move forward without losing a 
 bishop, and his queen's bishop is totally confined : this is 
 his best move. 
 
 34. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 113 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The king to his 3d square. 
 
 B. K. bishop to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. rook's square. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 36. 
 
 W. The K. b. pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. bishop to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 37. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. rook's 4th (/). 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The king to his queen's 3d. 
 B. The bishop to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The king takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 40. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. bishop's 4th (g). 
 B. The bishop to his square. 
 
 41. ,W. 
 
 (/) The pawn which you give up is of no value ; and by 
 placing your yook here, you prevent his king from passing 
 to save his pawn in the middle of the board. 
 
 (S") W you give check with the pawn you lose him : but 
 you might leave the rook and pawn, which would be un- 
 assailable, and employ your king in taking the adverse 
 
 VOL. I. I pawns*
 
 -.v 
 
 114 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The rook to the adverse king's 4th. 
 
 B. The bishop returns to his knight's 2d (7i). 
 
 42. 
 
 W. The pawn gives check. 
 B. The king to his queen's 3d. 
 
 43. 
 
 W. The rook to the adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. bishop to the adverse king's 4th. 
 
 44. 
 
 W. The pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 45. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. bishop's 2d. 
 B. The bishop gives check. 
 
 46. 
 
 W. The king to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 B. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 47. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse K. knight's 2d. 
 B. The bishop gives check. 
 
 pawns; and then queen a pawn on that wing where the 
 obstruction should be least. 
 
 (A) As you keep his king from passing to attack your 
 pawns, and as you can, by placing your pieces upon the 
 black squares, render his bishop a mere nullity, he cannot 
 beguile the lingering interval before defeat, with any 
 operation of the least promise. 
 
 48. W.
 
 FIRST ESSAY. 115 
 
 48. 
 
 W. The king to adverse Q. rook's 3d. 
 B. The king- to his Q, bishop's 4th. 
 
 49. 
 
 W. The pawn 1 square. 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 50. 
 W. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 His pawns may be swept from the board in 
 three moves ; but as you may checkmate with 
 the king and rook, it is unnecessary to take them, 
 unless they should be in the way of your pieces^ 
 
 The foyndaiion for the defeat of the Black was 
 laid at the FOURTH, fis a prelude to the fifth 
 move. The proper step to be substituted, may be 
 seen inPhilidors Third Regular Party, vol. II. 
 
 The SCALE OF POWERS is recalculated, and 
 now follows the Third Essay. 
 
 2
 
 116 INTRODUCTION TO CHES6. 
 
 THE BLACK MOTIN6 FIRST. 
 
 B. King's pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. The same. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. The queen to adverse K. rook's 4th (a). 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d (b}.* 
 
 4. B. 
 
 (a) The movements of the black are not proposed for 
 imitation : but as the course to be pursued by one player 
 depends in a great measure on that pursued by the other 
 these examples are given that the tyro might not be sur- 
 prised into a defeat, or vm compensated loss, if an oppo- 
 nent should adopt this a fundamental step influencing the 
 aspect of the game materially. 
 
 (b) She thus prevents the adversary, as well from taking 
 the king's, as from taking the bishop's pawn. 
 
 The reader will perceive that the game might be finished 
 in four moves, which is the earliest termination it can 
 well be made to receive, and is called the Scholar's Mate . 
 
 The
 
 SECOND ESSAY. 117 
 
 4. 
 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d (c); 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse knight's 4th (</). 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square (c). 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn checking (/). 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The knight takes the queen. 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. 
 
 The game may indeed be finished by the second move of 
 the second player ; but there requires so much fatuity to 
 permit this, that it has the name of the Fool's Mate. 
 
 (c) He brings two pieces to bear upon your K pawn. 
 
 (</) He brings three pieces to bear upon your K. b. 
 pawn. 
 
 (e) PHIMDOR says [Back-game to Fifth Regular Party] 
 that the king's knight may be moved here. It will appear 
 that it ought. After marking the result of this process, see 
 the Variation. 
 
 (/) If the black adopt this play, PHILIDOR'S direction 
 is, to take with the queen, and you will gain a, piece: but 
 there leaves this branch of the play, as if victory were 
 easy. It is fair to conclude, that, calculating on gaining 
 a piece, he did not weigh other circumstances, nor carry 
 the experiment farther. 
 
 i 3 8. B.
 
 118 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. The knight takes the rook (g). 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d (7i). 
 
 9. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d (i). 
 
 10. 
 
 B. K. rook to its K. bishop's square (Ar). 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d (I). 
 
 11. B. 
 
 (g) Let us review the board, and balance the forces. 
 Reckoning his knight as lost, you have no advantage. 
 Against the' value of his knight and bishop, set down the 
 value of your rook and pawn, according to the scale of 
 parsers. It appears that the gain of a piece is merely no- 
 minal. As you have a pawn doubled in the worst manner, and 
 must lose some moves to take his knight, perhaps no play 
 could substantiate any superiority of sii nation on your part. 
 
 (h) If you were to proceed to take his knight with your 
 king, the latter would get into an embarrassed situation, 
 by the adversary's moving his queen's knight's pawn 1 
 square, seating his bishop un the great diagonal, and then 
 moving his king's bishop's pawn two squares. 
 
 (i) \\ ere you to attack his rook's pawn, or his rook ? 
 with your knight, you would lose moves, or have your 
 knight forced. 
 
 (k] Had he castled, his bishop's pawn, which is to make 
 an opening, could not h:ive moved. 
 
 (I) Your pieces are played out that your rook may take 
 
 hil
 
 SECOND ESSAY: 119 
 
 11. 
 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 W. The pawn takes* the pawn (m). 
 
 12. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 W. The king to his second square (n). 
 
 13. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. knight's 3d. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. The bishop to his K. rook's 4th (o). 
 W. The rook to its K. bishop's square. 
 
 his knight, and to prevent the knight's escape, should his 
 rook's action open on the bishop's file. 
 
 (m) Had you suffered him, either to take with his pawn, 
 or to push it on your bishop, the danger of his approaches 
 would have been greater. 
 
 (n) Had you castled, he would have attacked your 
 knight with his bishop; the obvious consequence would 
 be, that you could not take his knight without surrendering 
 your own. 
 
 (o) He retreats because his object is not to exchange piece 
 for piece, but to gain a piece. 
 
 i 4 17, B.
 
 120 INTRODUCTION TO CH1SI. 
 
 / 
 
 IT! 
 
 B. Q knight to his queen's 2d. 
 W. The king to his square (p). 
 
 18. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square (<jr). 
 W. Q. b. pawn 2 squares (r). 
 
 19. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q,. bishop to K. knight's square (s) 
 
 20. 
 
 B. The king castles. 
 W. Q. bishop to his K. rook's 2d. 
 
 21. 
 
 B. Q. rook to its king's square. 
 W. K. knight to his square (t). 
 
 (p) To frustrate his design of obtaining your knight by 
 accumulated attacks, you take thi opportunity to withdraw 
 your king. You equally lose in the back game. 
 
 (5) To prerent your knight from entering his game. 
 
 (r) This necessarily either breaks his pawns, or leads 
 them to be advanced in less systematic order. 
 
 (s) Had your bishop halted at the second square, you 
 would have lost a knight. 
 
 (t) You had better remove the knight to an incommodious 
 seat, than let two or three pieces be occupied merely to 
 guard him. 
 
 22. B.
 
 SECOND ESSAY. 
 
 121 
 
 22. 
 
 B. The rook takes the rook. 
 W. The knight takes the rook. 
 
 23. 
 
 B. The knight to his Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. K. pawn one square. 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 25. 
 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 26. 
 
 B. The rook takes the bishop, and gives check. 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 27- 
 
 B. The rook takes the pawn. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 28. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 W. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 29. 
 
 B. The rook takes the pawn, and gives check. 
 W. The king to his 2d square (). 
 
 30. B. 
 
 (u) Had you moved your king to his fourth, he would 
 have pushed his pawn resigned his rook for the bishop, to 
 draw away the knight and made a queen.
 
 122 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 30. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn i square (x). 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse Icing's 4th. 
 
 31. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 32. 
 
 B. The Q. pawn gives check. 
 W. The king to his queen's 2d. 
 
 33. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. The knight to his king's 3d. 
 
 34. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 35. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The king to his second square. 
 
 36. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn one square. 
 W. The king to his bishop's square. 
 
 37- 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 38. B. 
 
 (x) It were improper to push his most advanced pawn ; 
 he therefore supports him, that you might not gain a pawn 
 by playing at double points with your bishop.
 
 SECOND ESSAY. 123 
 
 38. 
 
 B- The rook gives check. 
 W. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 39. 
 
 B. The rook takes the pawn. 
 W. The king to his knight's 4th. 
 
 40. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square (y}. 
 W. The bishop to his king's rook's 2d. 
 
 41. 
 
 B. The rook to adverse king's 2d. 
 W. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 42. 
 
 B. The rook to adverse queen's 2d. 
 W. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 43. 
 
 B, The K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The white must resign either the bishop or 
 the knight ; and will evidently lose. 
 
 (3;) The Black could win, by pushing his pawn on the 
 queen's side: but it may tend to improyement to play, 
 as if he had those only on the king's side. 
 
 VARIATION
 
 124 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 VARIATION 
 
 On the Fifth Move of the White, p. 117 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 6. 
 B. The bishop takes the pawn, and gives 
 
 check*. 
 W. The king to his queen's square. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. rook's 4th. 
 W. K. rook to its K. bishop's square. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. K. bishop returns to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. The K. knight takes the pawn. 
 
 9. 
 B. The K. knight gives check, at the adverse 
 
 K. bishop's 2d. 
 W. The K. rook takes the knight. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen takes the knight. 
 W. The K. bishop takes the pawn, and gives 
 check. 
 
 * The queen may take the pawn ; and the game will not 
 be sooner lost. 
 
 11. E.
 
 SECOND ESSAY. 
 11. 
 
 B. The king to the queen's square. 
 
 W. K, rook to adverse K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 12. 
 
 B: The queen takes the r, pawn. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square (a). 
 
 13. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 W. K. rook returns to K. bishop's square, 
 
 14. 
 
 B. K. bishop to the king's %d. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. rook's 4th. 
 
 W. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the queen. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn. Has gained a 
 pawn, and a winning situation. If both 
 parties be properly played, the relative 
 advantage of the white, at the sixteenth 
 move, will notbe greater; althoughbyde- 
 pressing the play of the black, the queen 
 is forced, or checkmate given, at an early 
 stage, in some illusory examples con- 
 structed to have a false brilliancy. 
 
 (a) If your rook take the bishop, his queen will obtain 
 the rook by a check. 
 
 BACK
 
 126 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Seventeenth Move of the White p. 120. 
 POSITION OF THE PIECES. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 2 squares (aj. 
 
 (a) As the king does not retire from the ambuscaded check, 
 the adversary can \uu a piece. 
 
 18. B.
 
 SECOND ESSAY. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. K. pawn 1 square (bj. 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 20. 
 
 B. The knight to his king's 4th. 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d (c). 
 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn 
 
 B. The Q. rook takes the knight. 
 W. The king takes the rook. 
 
 23. 
 
 B. The rook takes the knight (e}. 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 (b) He before pushed his queen's pawn upon your 
 bishop; his play changes with yours: nothing is to be done 
 by routine. 
 
 (c) You would gain but a pawn for a knight by giving 
 check ; you have the same alleviation of loss this way, and 
 escape a proportion of inconvenience. 
 
 (d) As no endeavour to save a piece can avail, you take 
 his pawn. 
 
 (e) His rook would be in a precarious situation, were h 
 to take with one of the other pieces. 
 
 2*. B,
 
 128 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. The knight takes the rook, and gives check. 
 W. The king to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 25. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 The black may win by changing one pawn 
 on the king's side, and passing the other. 
 
 It appears from these results, that the rook, 
 the second piece in power, is not superior to 
 the knight and bishop in the slight degree at 
 which it has been prevalent to rate it, but 
 very materially so; and as the queen is felt in 
 play to be equal to any two pieces, except two 
 rooks i so the rook is not to be set down as 
 merely equal to counteract some other piece, 
 but as having a more efficient operation in 
 proportion to its range of action, though 
 something auxiliary is wanting to make it 
 equal to two smaller pieces. 
 
 Cbirti
 
 THIRD ESSAY. 129 
 
 CfnrD 
 i. 
 
 W. King's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his Q,. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. knight to his Q. bishop's 3d (a). 
 
 & 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B; K. r. pawn 1 square (fij. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square (c). 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square (df). 
 
 5, W. 
 
 (a) To attack your queen's pawn, or your bishop, as the 
 play may require. 
 
 (6) He permits you to place two pawns in the centre, pro* 
 posing afterwards to break them. His rook's pawn moves to 
 keep off your queen's bishop from his knight's 4th. 
 
 (c) Few players meeting with the mode of opposition, 
 which the adversary attempts, would hesitate to push the 
 queen's pawn at this place, yet it would be wrong. Vide 
 the first Variation. This move of the queen's rook's pawn 
 to prevent his bishop from giving check, should be first 
 adopted ; then you may plant your pawns in the centre, 
 without inconvenience. The student will notjind in Phi. 
 lidor's work, any direction with regard to this position. 
 
 tor., i. &
 
 130 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. a. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 6. 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 B. K. bishop to his knight's 2d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square (e). 
 B. Q. bishop to his queen's 2d (f). 
 
 9. 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d for). 
 
 B. K. knight to his king's 2d. 
 
 
 
 (J) It -were at least as well to move his queen's pawn as 
 
 in the third variation. 
 
 . 
 " (e) Were you to suffer his queen's bishop to attack your 
 
 knight, his game would be much stronger. 
 
 (f) That his Q. knight may attack your K. bishop, with- 
 out being lost by a check from your queen. 
 
 (g) The adversary cannot place his queen at his king's 2d, 
 without being subject to have several pieces embarrassed by 
 
 the action of this knight. 
 
 ' 
 
 10 W 
 
 .
 
 THIRD ESSAT. 131 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d (h). 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 W. The queen to her 2d square. 
 B. The king to his rook's 2d. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The king castles on his queen's side (ij. 
 B. Q. knight to his rook's 4th. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his rook's 2d; 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square* 
 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its K. bishop's square. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 (h) Were you to place your queen at her knight's 3d, 
 attacking two pawns, he would offer you the less valuable, 
 which you could not take without losing one of yours in the 
 centre. Vide the second Variation. 
 
 (z) Though your pieces are well advanced on your own 
 field, they cannot at present enter his game with advantage. 
 You castle on this side, with a view to carry a greater force 
 against his king. 
 
 K 2 16. W.
 
 132 INTRODUCTION TO CHESI. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. knight's square (kj. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The king takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. knight to adverse Q. bishop's 4th-. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen to her 3d. 
 B. The knight takes the bishop (I). 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The queen takes the knight. 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. K. rook to its 2d square (m). 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn (w). 
 
 (k) This seems the best of several alternatives. Were 
 you to push the queen's knight's pawn 1 square, his bishop 
 would take it. Were you to push that pawn two squares, 
 your king would be exposed, without deriving any certain 
 advantage. And had you taken his bishop, his pawns would 
 have united in the centre. 
 
 (I) This removal is a considerable relief to him, 
 
 (m) You cannot preserve your pawns from dispersion ; 
 therefore, you prepare to attack his king. 
 
 (ri) He accomplishes his design of breaking your centre, 
 but with the accumulation of circumstances round his posi- 
 tion, equally adverse to his security.
 
 THIRD ESSAY. 
 
 133 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The Q. knight takes the pawn. 
 B. The knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The Q. knight gives check (o). 
 B. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 23. 
 "W. The pawn takes the pawn, discovering check 
 
 from the rook. 
 B. The king to his knight's square. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The queen checks at adverse king's 3d. 
 35. The rook interposes. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to his bishop's square. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse rook's 2d (p). 
 B. The queen to her 2d square. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its K. rook's square. 
 B. Q. rook to its king's square (qr). 
 
 (o) The knight is thus sacrificed, but you may confide in 
 obtaining at least an equivalent. 
 
 (p) If you play the Q. rook to the K. rook's square, he 
 will remove his king to his 2d. 
 
 (g) Did not his queen's rook remove, that piece and hii 
 bishop would be lost for your king's rook. 
 
 K 3 28. W.
 
 s 134 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. rook to its king's 3d (r). 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The .queen to adverse rook's 4th. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The rook takes the bishop. 
 B. The rook takes the rook (s). 
 
 31. 
 W. The queen to adverse K. rook's square, 
 
 giving ch.-ck. 
 B. The rook interposes. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The queen takes the knight. 
 B. Q. pawn one square. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse K. rook's square. 
 B. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 P4. 
 
 W. The queen fakes the rook, checking. 
 B. The kmg to his bishop's 2d (t). 
 
 (r) Had ht forced you to change queens, by giving check; 
 
 you would have gained a piece, and the complete com. 
 
 maud of the play. 
 
 (*) If his knight take yours, you will soon give mate, 
 
 (t) If he chuse the queen's 2d, you push your pawn, and 
 
 his rook must not take, because it would be lost by a diver- x 
 
 gent check. 
 
 35. W.
 
 THIRD ESSAY. f/t 135 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The knight gives check. 
 B. The rook takes the knight. 
 
 HTA136/ 
 
 W. The queen takes the rook. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square (u). 
 
 W. The queen gives check, at adverse K. 
 bishop's 4th. r a 
 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 38- .,,|T.7f 
 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. And will win ; 
 
 because the Black king, unless he aban- 
 don the position to the advanced white 
 pawns, must move his pawns till at 
 length the circumstances of the board 
 will be, That the White king will have 
 to intercept two cooperating patens? arid 
 the Black king, two pawns doubled on a 
 file, supported by a pawn on an adjoining 
 file. One of the last, if the White king 
 move occasionally to give them the posi- 
 tion, can be queened. 
 
 () He neglects the last of your double pawns as of no 
 yalue compared with what he must desert. 
 
 * 4 FIRST
 
 JS6 INTRODUCTION TO CHEII. "2 
 
 ' i#HM W 
 FIRST VARIATION. 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the White; page 129. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. Queen's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The K. bishop gives check. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The Q,. bishop interposes (a). 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 It is evident that you cannot prevent the loss 
 of a pawn. 
 
 (a) When attacked in a similar way with this, you should 
 generally interpose the bishop, not the knight. 
 
 SECOND
 
 THIRD ESSAY. 137 
 
 SECOND VARIATION. 
 
 -On the Tenth Mope of the White; page 131. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 ii 
 
 W. The queen takes the Q. kn. pawn. 
 B. Q. rook to its knight's square (a). 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse Q. rook's 3d. 
 B. Q. rook to its Q. knight's 3d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The queen to her rook's 4th. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The queen to her square. 
 P. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The queen takes the knight. 
 B. The Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 (a) He must not at present take your queen's pawn, be. 
 cause, by exchanging knights, you would force him to aban- 
 don his king's rook's pawn. 
 
 THIRD
 
 138 INTRODUCTION TOl CHESS. 
 
 THIRD VARIATION. 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the Black; page 129. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 6. ,-:'; 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 7. .U 
 W. Q. knight to his Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to his K. bishop's 4th O). .tf 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 9. iT .11 
 
 W. Q. knight to adverse queen's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her king's square. 
 
 .}>< 10. 
 
 W. jQ. knight to his king's 3d. 
 B. Q. bishop to his K. rook's 2d. 
 
 iijiuun i : 
 
 (a) This gives his king an opportunity to castle. 
 
 11. W.
 
 
 THIRD ESSAY. 139 
 
 11. 
 
 W. K. knight to his king's 2d. 
 B. K. knight to his king's 2d, or K. kn. pawn 
 1 square. 
 
 The fourth move of the Black in this Varia- 
 tion, may seem to lead to a better position than 
 the move in the game. He can break the white 
 centre pawns at discretion; and has preserved 
 the ability to bring out his pieces, which have 
 been left unmoved, to a general assault on the 
 forces of the enemy, without embarrassing each 
 other. On the other hand, the white, by push- 
 ing his pawns on the left wing, supported by 
 pieces, will have a particular attack on the ad- 
 verse king, which from the protracted state of 
 some parts of the black game, may decide the 
 contest, before any partial successes of the second 
 mover can be of use.
 
 140 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 
 
 The introductory chapter classes the pieces 
 in the order of their relative values: but no- 
 thing: is there added of the ratio in value which 
 
 o 
 
 two or three inferior pieces bear to a superior, 
 or two superior; as the introduction of minute 
 discriminations, before the attainment of some 
 practical knowledge, might have perplexed the 
 reader. Position frequently avails more than 
 Comparative Force. But where the game has 
 proceeded equally as to position, the propriety of 
 accepting or declining an exchange, depends on 
 a balance of the value of the pieces. The fol- 
 lowing result of careful calculation is therefore 
 presented, as a contribution toward forming an 
 accurate scale for mixed exchanges. 
 The pawn - - - 1, 
 
 knight - - 3,04 or nearly 3. 
 
 bishop - - 3,5 3^ 
 
 rook - - - 5,48 - - 5 
 
 queen 9,94 - - - 10. 
 
 Speaking independently of position, the va- 
 lues of the pieces, are to eaclr other in this 
 proportion, which is the proportion of their pow- 
 ers.
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 141 
 
 ers. The pawn has besides, in its capacity of 
 promotion, a dormant value which is considered 
 in the seventh title. The nature of thegameputs 
 the king's value above competition. 
 
 This theoretical calculation seems to agree 
 with the practical statement of powers in the 
 second volume, p. 279; and may assist to find 
 the force and ratio of many combinations and 
 oppositions not to be found there. The scale is 
 deduced from the following general properties. 
 
 I. Range of Action, with the Board open. 
 
 Assuming an equal probability, that in play, 
 a piece will occupy, at times, every square 
 within its range of transit, its rays of action 
 extend thus : 
 
 The pawn to 2 squares on any one of the six 
 centre files; and, on either of the rooks', to 1. 
 The knight ----- 5,2!?. 
 
 bishop - 8,75. 
 
 rook 14. 
 
 queen 22,75. 
 
 In order to estimate some farther properties 
 of the exchangeable pieces, it is necess- 
 ary to state, that the king's move extends 
 
 to 6,5625 squares. 
 
 On
 
 142| jl f INTRODUCTION .TO CHESS. 
 
 On this basis might be constructed, with 
 satisfactory exactness, a calculation of the quan- 
 tity of power growing out of the peculiar move 
 of every piece were it not that deductioni 
 must be made, chiefly from the full power of 
 the stronger classes, on account of obstacles 
 promiscuously intervening between the point 
 of station and the natural limits of the piece's 
 range. These deductions depend upon circum- 
 stances which diminish, by a necessary effect, 
 as the game proceeds, but in a different degree in 
 different games. At first, fourteen exchangeable 
 pieces, the total of whose force is nearly treble 
 the capacity of the field*, are kept from instant 
 collision by the intervention of a double row 
 of pawns. To the Pawn the opening step is 
 free. The Knight cannot be intercepted ; and 
 one of the Bishops may generally attack, at the 
 second or third move. In the early game, the 
 sphere of the Queen is much abridged: but she 
 commonly enters on action before the Rook, 
 partly from her central situation, and partly, 
 because comprising the move of the Bishop, 
 she can avail herself of the first openings, 
 which are greatest in a diagonal direction. 
 
 * See title IX, 1st Consolidated Scale. 
 
 II.
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 
 
 
 
 II. Liability to Obstruction. 
 
 ' 
 
 It is necessary to fix on some specific stage of 
 the game on which to . found an average. 
 While the election of a player keeps a piece in 
 reserve, the probable sum of obstacle to the full 
 exertion of its power is no ground for a de- 
 duction from its force. But as soon as any 
 piece whose step is bounded only by tlie board 
 is brought into play, as far as the interspersion 
 of pieces prevents it from moving or acting as 
 in an open field, its comparative superiority is 
 diminished in relation to pieces which having ,a 
 shorter range are less affected by obstructions, 
 and is peculiarly diminished in relation to the 
 knight. And it is chiefly to give the VAULTING 
 MOTION of the knight as much influence in the 
 calculation as it has on the board, that an allow- 
 ance for obstruction, on a common basis, is 
 deducted from the Range of Action, and the 
 Facility of Transit, as it affects these properties 
 in any class. 
 
 The computation must have respect to the 
 thinnings by exchange which precede decision 
 in a well-played party : yet if the reduction ia 
 the sets be immoderate, the knight will have 
 too small, a value in the scale for common appli- 
 cation.
 
 144 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 cation. Taken from the middle part of the 
 advancing game, the same standard will apply 
 to the most advanced stage without sensible 
 error, on account of circumstances which attend 
 the progress of attenuation. 
 
 Out of the double set, assuming six pieces and 
 eight pawns to have been taken off by exchange, 
 a common foundation is laid for calculating 
 the average of obstruction to each agent, from 
 the promiscuous distribution, on the board, 
 of the pawns and pieces remaining with it.' 
 
 Under the superintendance of two minds ex- 
 ercised in competition, while every movement is 
 directed, can any circumstance of impediment 
 occur which could not have been prevented by the 
 precaution of one player, nor is attributable 
 to the design of the other? Although rival skill 
 produce, and shape, and direct the higher cir- 
 cumstances of the play, yet an independent 
 cause regularly operating must influence 
 the average of impediment for the follow- 
 ing reasons. 1. Pieces may be obstructed by 
 their own set as well as by enemies: and this no 
 player can prevent entirely, or attempt to prevent 
 generally, unless he absurdly attack without a 
 particular object; and if he direct a combina- 
 tion on a specific point, should the adversary 
 obviate it, one of his pieces may become an ob- 
 stacle
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 145 
 
 stacle to another without any change of posi- 
 tion, merely from the necessity of a change of 
 plan. Thus, the Queen will stand commo- 
 diously before the Bishop, in preparing to at- 
 tack the King, better supported than support- 
 ing ; but if the adversary, in fortifying his 
 King so that no impression can be made, should 
 leave a small piece supported by a small piece 
 en prise with the Queen, this powerful assailant 
 becomes an obstacle to the Bishop; for were 
 the latter in front, supported instead of sup- 
 porting, a piece might be won. And as the 
 player, unable to prevent the occurrence of im- 
 pediment from his own pieces, can only avoid 
 planting unnecessary obstructions to the agents 
 first wanted ; so, having greater and more 
 practicable objects than to confine the adverse 
 set generally, he can only block the most im- 
 portant avenues leading into his own section, 
 or endeavour to intercept the escape of a hostile 
 piece advanced incautiously. 
 
 The proficient may be considered to decrease 
 the effect of a tendency in his pieces to mutual 
 obstruction one half; and to add an entire ratio to 
 the degree of obstruction, at least as to import- 
 ant points, which the promiscuous distribution 
 of his forces would without intention present to 
 the counter-set, but to intercept the action or 
 
 VOL. i. L transit
 
 146 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 transit of an enemy, a piece must be supported *, 
 so that virtually l-uco inlerponents are employed, 
 which, counterpoising the duplication just ad- 
 mitted, brings back this division of the ratio to 
 its casual amount. The sum of pieces remain- 
 ing, is taken at Five Pieces and Four Pawns of 
 the same set, as impediments to any PIECE, one 
 of themselves ~ 4 ; and Five Pieces and Four 
 PAWNS of the opposite party = from 8 to 4, as 
 impediments to any PIECE not one of themselves. 
 In enumerating interponents to an adversePiECE, 
 the King must always be kept excluded; and 
 the Queen and Rook must be dismissed from 
 the account against smaller pieces, as particu- 
 larly stated below. 
 
 III. General Range of Local Action. 
 
 This term designates, , 1. The command, 
 from a stationary post, of points or lines in. 
 open space, by which an unsupported adverse 
 piece, or a supported adverse piece of superior 
 value, is kept from entering that part of the 
 
 * The exception, that an unsupported piece may stop 
 transit of a pawn, modifies the account in its place. 
 
 field.
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 147 
 
 field. 2. If the piece's move extend so far, the 
 term includes one square beyond the open space, 
 whether that square be occupied by a comrade 
 or an enemy. It includes it, if occupied by a 
 comrade j because an enemy is equally ex- 
 cluded; arid because as much is thus allowed, 
 for the faculty of defending, by support, sta- 
 tionary pieces from a stationary point, as 
 the faculty is worth : a very different thing 
 from the facility with which a piece can 
 pass to defend a particular square, it is sel- 
 dom more availing in one of the highest 
 class than one of the lowest. The exercised 
 player will not commission any piece to defend 
 more than an individual already en prise 
 except against a single piece; or except 
 the pieces defended are not jointly worth 
 more than either of the pieces separately attack- 
 ing; or except the supporter, if drawn to one 
 defended square by exchange, will thence com- 
 mand the other. 3. The term includes one 
 square beyond the open space, if that square be 
 occupied by an enemy, equal or inferior" in 
 value; because the battery on it confines two 
 pieces. 
 
 As the PAWN'S small, oblique Range of 
 action cannot be obstructed, because nothing 
 can intervene, it remains, as under the first 
 
 L 2 title.
 
 148 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 title, (e Range of Action, with the Board 
 open ' ' 
 
 2.* 
 
 The KNIGHT'S Action is unaffected by the 
 intervention of a piece; there is therefore no 
 deduction from the ratio, 
 
 5,25. 
 
 The obstruction to the Action of the BISHOP 
 is to be calculated on four pieces and four 
 pawns of the same set 4, and 4 pawns and 
 1,71 piece f of the opposite set, = 9,71. 
 
 The Bishop has four rays of action at the 
 distance of a square from the margin of the 
 board ; on the average 3,0625 rays, conse- 
 quently, it would require as many pieces 
 placed uniformly to intercept some part of each 
 ray. 3,0625 pieces, without being supposed to 
 
 * Without troubling the reader with the details of a sepa- 
 rate calculation for the rook's pawn, I shall give the result in 
 title VII. 
 
 f Of five antagonist pieces 4, deducting the King, the 
 proportion is thus deduced. Suppose the opposite set to be 
 full. Under the ordinary maxims of play, the Bishop can. 
 r.ot be intercepted by the Queen, nor by either of the Rooks, 
 nor by the Bishop on a different chequer : Two Knights and 
 a Bishop only intercept it. Therefore 3^x 4_ 
 
 7 
 
 fall
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 149 
 
 fall constantly on different rays, block the 
 Bishop, on an average, from 3,34 squares of 
 its range: Therefore, 
 
 o 7 K f , 9,71x8,75x3,34 
 8,75 (open rang-e) -; ~~' =7, 3. 
 
 4~\/v \s ^ C li^^^ ^ 
 
 The deduction from the Rook's Range of 
 Action is to be calculated on = 4 interponents 
 of the same set, and on four pawns, and 3, 43* 
 pieces of the opposite set = 11,43. 
 
 The rook has four rays of action from a seat not 
 touching the margin of the board ; on the ave- 
 rage 3,5 rays: And 3,5 pieces without being 
 supposed to fall uniformly on different rays, will 
 block the Rook from 4,875 squares of its range. 
 Therefore, 
 
 u, / > 11,43x14x4,875 ln KQ 
 14 (open range) _L__^J =10,52 
 
 To find the ratio of abridgment to the Action 
 of the QUEEN, calculate on 12 interponents; 
 including four pawns and four pieces of the 
 opposite party. 
 
 * Thus found. The adverse pieces are assumed to be en- 
 tire. The Rook's action may be intercepted, as a commoa 
 event, by any piece allowed to stand en prise y except the 
 Queen. Therefore 4x 6 ,.* 
 
 L 3 The
 
 150 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 The Queen lias eight rajs of action from a 
 station not in contact with the boundary of the 
 field; on Ihe average, 6,5625 rays, and the 
 same number of pieces, without falling con- 
 stantly on a different ray, will block the Queen 
 from 8,57 squares of her range. Therefore, 
 
 OQ rr / N 12x22,75x8,57 
 
 2ft, 5 (open range) ^ ^ 6 ,5625 = ^ 18 
 
 To recapitulate the results, the general range 
 of Action extends thus: 
 
 pawn - - - 2 
 knight - - - 5,25 
 bishop - - 7,3 
 
 F00 k 10,52 
 
 queen 17,18. 
 
 IV. General Facility of Transit. 
 
 This term includes the number of optional 
 squares within tJie reach of the piece at a more. 
 
 For pieces which move as thei/ take, compre- 
 hending every class except the pawn, the scale 
 of proportion in Title I. is the measure of 
 Facility of Transit, with the hoard open. Their 
 General Facility of Transit is the same as their 
 General Range of Action,, except that the 
 
 sphere
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 151 
 
 sphere of transit terminates on open squares or 
 lines, when the square beyond is occupied by a 
 comrade. The share of obstacle is greater by 
 this difference., and will affect the Knight. 
 When the square beyond is occupied by an ene^ 
 my, it is never to be deducted; for were the 
 enemy supported, it is plain that the exclusion, 
 or depulsion, arises from the supporting piece's 
 command of tljat point in the field, which 
 would equally operate were the square vacant. 
 This depulsion is altogether different from obi- 
 struction; and as it depends on the General 
 Mcuige of Action, has already had its weight in 
 the account. 
 
 The PAWN in transit, moves on the average 
 1/2 square, having one feeble ray of forward 
 motion, which coincides with neither of its rays 
 of action. Hence the Pawn is subject to the 
 peculiar disability of being blocked by an ad- 
 verse piece, which does not stand en prise with 
 it; a great disadvantage to a separated pawn, 
 or to a pawn which stands last in a united dia- 
 gonal chain. Hence, too, the adverse King 
 may block it. 
 
 Recurring to the common basis in Title II. r 
 the PAWN is liable to be impeded by five pieces 
 ?f the same set = 2,5, and by five pieces of the 
 
 j, 4 opposite
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 opposite set = 10*, together 12,5. Therefore, 
 
 12,5 
 1,2 (open range of transit) *^Z" * 
 
 The obstruction to the KNIGHT'S Range of 
 Transit is to be calculated on four pieces and 
 four pawns of the same set 4. The opposite 
 set cannot obstruct the knight. Therefore, 
 
 4x5 25 
 5,25 (open range of transit) ^4 4,92. 
 
 Of the other pieces, the general Range of 
 Transit differs from the general Range of Ac- 
 tion, no farther than as already explained. 
 
 As many pieces as the BISHOP has rays of 
 motion, placed on some of the rays, will block 
 it, in transit, from 4 squares. Therefore, 
 97lx8,75x4_ 
 ^64X3,0625" 
 
 As many pieces as the ROOK, etc will 
 
 block it, in transit, from 5,65 squares. There- 
 fore, 
 
 11,43 x 14 x 5,65 
 
 14 '- ,. ' --9,96. 
 
 O* X 3,5 
 
 * The counterpawn in the file obstructs three-fifths of the 
 range of transit till disposed of : but as the inquiry respects 
 the worth of a piece balanced against one of a different class, 
 this is a circumstance foreign to the account. The place to 
 which a pawn may go in making a capture, presents an op- 
 tion of transit too seldom to influence a general calculation. 
 
 As
 
 SCALE O POWERS. 153 
 
 As many pieces as the QUEEN, etc. ....... 
 
 will block it, in transit, from 9,48 squares 
 Therefore, 
 
 997* 1% X 2^75 x %48 i ,. rq 
 2 ^ 75 ' 64xti,5623 ' 
 
 It results, that each class has, on the average, 
 within its range of transit, the following propor- 
 tion of open space, or attainable points. 
 The pawn - - - - l f 
 
 knight 4,92. 
 
 bishop 7,02. 
 
 rook - - - - 9,96. 
 queen ,"-,.- 16,5 { ). 
 
 These sums merely measure the simple faculty 
 of removal, according to the extent of which a 
 piece is less liable to be forced. But when the 
 Facility of Transit, is considered in subserviency 
 to attack, it receives Another value, which is 
 set down in the following title. 
 
 V. Power of Transitive Attack. 
 
 This is a conjunction of the Facility of Tran- 
 sit under a new modification, and of the Range 
 of Action under a new modification; and, 
 again, the Modified Range of Transit is a com- 
 bination of the points which have a bearing on the 
 piece to be assailed, any one of which can be reached 
 
 at
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 at a move, with the ordinary length of the line 
 on which the assailant passes to the point selected as 
 a position. So the modified Range of Action 
 is a combination of the number of objects 'which 
 the piece can attack at once, with the Ordinary 
 Mange itself. 
 
 The PAWN can have a bearing on an indivi- 
 dual but from .,015 points, as it respects the 
 board; and the line along which it passes is 
 never less than 1. It can attack two pieces at 
 once; and its general range of action is 2. 
 Therefore, 
 
 ,0i5x 
 
 The sum of points which, in relation to a de- 
 signed attack, is open to the choice of a piece, 
 is valuable both as counteracting the effect of 
 obstruction, and as enabling the assailant to 
 embrace with the adverse King, or other prin- 
 cipal object, minor enemies in the promiscuous 
 field. This property resides in the Queen in an 
 eminent degree; for besides moving as a bishop 
 to attack as a bishop, and as a rook to attack 
 as a rook, she passes as a bishop to attack as a 
 rook, and as a rook to attack as a bishop ; and 
 the latter branches of force include more posi- 
 tions than the former. The average number of 
 points to any one of which a piece can step to 
 gain a bearing on a specific square, as it might
 
 SCALE OF POSTERS. 155 
 
 have eluded the grasp of theory, is derived, in 
 every instance stated below, from actual permu- 
 tations on the board. 
 
 When the KNIGHT is in a position to assail a 
 piece, it has, most usually, the option of taking 
 one of two battering seats, and sometimes it can 
 pass but to one, equal, on the average to 1,53. 
 But as its move does not extend across the 
 board, this sum must be reduced, in cor- 
 respondence to the proportion that the number 
 of points on any one of which it might bear, 
 after a single move, holds to the entire field." 
 The Knight, then unable to direct its action on 
 an individual, distant more than four squares, 
 or not standing in some one of a peculiar set of 
 relations, has a proportion of optional point m 
 ,82 farther reduced in proportion to the tranr 
 sit z:,76. Unlike the latitude open to the other 
 exchangeable pieces, the line along which it 
 passes is always of the same length, and 
 (obliquing in an angle of about twenty-two 
 degrees five parts) extends across two squares. 
 But does it therefore advance an equal space? 
 Not in the sense in which the Bishop, the Rook, 
 the Queen, trace a line of distance; touching 
 every part of the line, they may stop intermedi- 
 ately, and operate from a variety of points 
 within the extreme one. It may .appear, that 
 
 the
 
 156 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 the Knight advances two squares, at least 
 when by successive transits, it pursues a re- 
 mote object: this illusion will be exposed, by 
 remarking an incommodious relation to many 
 contiguous points, where the player may as 
 often want the piece. Suppose it to be going 
 to any second square in a diagonal direction: 
 the tedious process consumes three moves. 
 The unvarying distance, prescribed for every 
 step of the Knight, is equivalent to 1 square: 
 the intervening space is a blank. Such a con- 
 clusion may come more forcibly, if we frame 
 the idea of an exchangeable piece armed with 
 the movements of the king ; which would prove 
 a superior engine to a knight. This is in- 
 tended merely to mark the effective extent of 
 this peculiar transit, and not to recommend any 
 innovation to be substituted for the only piece 
 which has uniformly the same power on every 
 European and Asiatic board. 
 
 The Knight can attack, at once, as many 
 enemies as, it has rays of action; on the average, 
 5,25. Its general range, unlike that of any 
 piece but the king, is coincident with the rays 
 5,25, Therefore, 
 
 ,70X1 + x/5,25 x 5,25 = 6,01 
 
 The ordinary length of the line along which 
 any piece other than the pawn passes to attack, 
 
 is
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 157 
 
 is found by dividing the general range of transit 
 by the number of rays of motion. 
 
 The BISHOP, when it can touch an antago- 
 nist, may attack usually from two points ; in 
 some relations, but from one. If already in a 
 line with the enemy, the option may increase 
 from one to six. On the average from 1,9 
 points. But as half the board is out of the 
 Bishop's field 1,9 -r- 2 = , 95 reduced propor- 
 tionately with the transit rr,76. The ordinary 
 length of the lineon.which the Bishop moves to 
 attack is 2,29. By its rays of action =. 3,0625, 
 its general range is 7,3. Therefore, 
 
 ,76x2,29 + v/3,0625x7,3 = 6,47 
 
 The ROOK can move to strike from one of 
 2,43 points ; including the incident of standing 
 already in a line with the object, and of con- 
 tinuing the attack from a new point in the same 
 direction ; reduced according to the propor- 
 tion of the transit ~ 1,73. The ordinary length 
 of the line along which it passes to a position is 
 2,85. The rays of action thence may touch 
 3,5 hostile stations; and its general range over 
 the local field is 10,52. Therefore, 
 
 "1,73 X 2,b5 + v/3,5 x 10,53 =11. 
 
 The QUEEN can batter any specific object 
 from an average of 7,2 points reduced accord- 
 ing to the proportion of the transit = 5,25. 
 
 The
 
 158 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 The ordinary length of the line along which it 
 passes to attack, is 2,53. Its rays of action 
 may terminate on 6,5625 tenanted squares ; 
 and its reduced sphere of play is 17,18. There- 
 fore, 
 
 > o 
 
 These results are ; 
 
 Pawn ---- 2, 
 Knight - - - 6,01 
 Bishop --- 6,47 
 Rook --- 11, 
 Queen --- 23,9 
 
 And these include the Power of Transitive 
 Defence. 
 
 VI. Dislodging Faculty. 
 
 This is nearer positive in its operation, accord- 
 ing to the shorter range, or inferior value, of 
 the assailant. Thus, if the Pawn advance on a 
 superior with a view to dislodge it, the im- 
 possibility of intervention withholds the alterna- 
 tive of covering ; while the value of the as- 
 sailed takes away, in ordinary relations on the 
 board, the alternative of resting on support; 
 and the fugitive by compulsion has only to 
 choose the most commodious place within its 
 
 range
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 
 
 range of transit. The effect of this power is 
 most useful against the Knight; because the 
 Knight cannot preserve any bearing on the 
 point menaced, or the point defended, if obliged 
 to remove. It avails less against the Bishop, 
 inasmuch as this piece can retire and preserve a 
 blocked bearing on a point of attack, or an opea 
 bearing on a point in defence. The Rook caa 
 withdraw and maintain its object, in some de- 
 gree more commodiously than the Bishop, unless 
 it be grappling in front of advancing pawns. 
 As the flying Queen has an option of new point* 
 of position correspondent to its range, the re- 
 moval of it is less inconvenient. 
 
 It is this faculty, engrafted on other powers, 
 which enables combining passed pawns, whea 
 fighting onward for promotion, to surmount, 
 most commonly, the superiority of a minor 
 piece, in forces opposing, over pieces support- 
 ing them. 
 
 The DISLODGING FACULTY is a measure of 
 competency in the assailant to compel a removal, 
 multiplied into the Power of Transitive Attack, 
 or a modification of it. 
 
 When the assailed can neither be supported, 
 nor covered, the competency to dislodge is 
 positive, = 1. When the assailed may be co- 
 vered, but is denied the alternative of being 
 
 supported,
 
 160 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 supported, the measure of competency is com~ 
 parative, ~ ,5. If the assailed may rest on 
 support, but is rarely covered, the measure is 
 the same. Against an inferior, the degree of 
 competency is merely a quantity ; which must 
 be diminished, as a value, according to the 
 lightness of the object in the general scale. 
 Against any piece having currently both the 
 alternatives, the dislodging Force would be ne- 
 gative or ,33. How far has each class the al- 
 ternative of protection ? 
 
 The Knight seldom stands behind the shield 
 of another piece. J. Its inferior value makes 
 exchange commonly an advantage. 2. It never 
 supports the piece which is interposed; so that 
 if under extraordinary circumstances it be 
 deemed neither proper to remove it, nor to let it 
 rest on support exposed to a bishop or rook, 
 three pieces may be confined by covering it. 
 3. A pawn, unless in making a capture, can 
 interpose only against a diagonal attack ; and 
 it is not worth while to calculate in what num- 
 ber of turns, a pawn provided with other support 
 might stand ready to intervene. 4. It is ex- 
 tremely awkward to cover a knight with a piece, 
 unless the interponent rest upon a pawn, or 
 reflect the action of the enemy. 
 
 The Bishop cannot be covered from the 
 
 knight ;
 
 SCALE OP POWERS. 161 
 
 knight ; and it is not usually desirable to cover 
 it from a superior's attack, when it can be sup- 
 ported. Both the Rcok and Bishop have four 
 weak sides, on which they cannot support a 
 piece which might interpose. Therefore none 
 of these pieces are currently covered. But from 
 the superior importance of the Queen, and 
 King, it is well to provide pawns, or other 
 pieces, to intervene when necessary ; especially 
 before the King. The Pawn has alone a positive 
 covering value, which is measured in the ninth 
 title. The other pieces are not adapted to sub- 
 serve as mere shields, in proportion to their 
 inferior value. But are conveniently interposed, 
 when they reflect the action of the assailant ; or 
 attack a piece superior to the assailant; or check 
 the king ; or enable the piece protected to 
 maintain a decisive position. Otherwise inter- 
 position, although it may happen to be the only 
 resource, is mostly a poor subterfuge. The 
 Queen supports on every side the piece inter- 
 vening ; the King affords similar support only 
 when the piece is in contact. The King is 
 assumed to be as often enabled to accept a 
 ready shield, as compelled to remove from the 
 attack of the bishop, rook or queen; which 
 makes the Dislodging Power against it ia re- 
 spect to these ,5. The Queen, as an essentially 
 VOL. i. M active
 
 162 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 active piece, is assumed to be covered from the 
 bishop or rook, with some confinement either to 
 itself or to the covering piece ; so that it is often 
 compelled by policy to remove, when it might 
 rest protected. This makes the Dislodging 
 Power of one of these, against it, nearly an 
 integer or ,75. A pawn or piece can. cover a 
 contiguous pawn better than one piece can coyer 
 another. 
 
 The occasional modification of the Power of 
 Transitive Attack follows a plain principle. The 
 CAPACITY TO ATTACK WITHOUT BEING SUP- 
 
 ;_ 
 
 PORTED OR WITHOUT GOING EN PRISE, as far 
 
 as it subsists in each class, upholds the Power 
 of Transitive Attack to its full ratio. When 
 the piece to be invaded has a reciprocity of 
 move, the Power of Transitive Attack must be 
 diminished by a full ratio as far as the reci- 
 procity extends in an inferior enemy; and as 
 far as the co-operation of a second is demanded 
 against a superior, it must be diminished in a 
 half ratio. 
 
 An attack to dislodge should propose either 
 to relieve the party from a menaced stroke ; 
 or to render the adversary more vulnerable by 
 dictating a specific change in his position. 
 The immediate or distant attainment of either 
 object, will depend on the number of squares to 
 
 which
 
 SCALE OF POWERS." 163 
 
 which the repelled enemy can go to maintain the 
 same bearing. Therefore when the measure of 
 Dislodging force has been involved into the 
 Power of Transitive Attack, divide by the num- 
 ber of squares just mentioned. 
 
 The PAWN possesses the Dislodging Faculty 
 integrally, zzl. In advancing on the Knight, 
 or Rook, it does not go en prise , consequently 
 the Power of Transitive Attack is independent 
 in respect to either, =2. In collision with the 
 Bishop, Queen, or King, it must be supported ; 
 the same power zzl. 
 
 The different classes, dislodged by the attack 
 of the Pawn, can retain a specific bearing from 
 new positions : 
 
 The knight 0, 
 
 bishop 2,29 
 
 rook 2,85 
 
 queen 6,78 
 
 king 2,19. 
 
 Therefore, ** = 2, against the Knight. 
 
 
 1 v9 
 
 * * = ,7 agawst the Rook. 
 2,85 
 
 Ixl 
 -i_. rr.44 against the Bishop, 
 
 2,29 
 
 M2 1x1
 
 1(H INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 Ixl 
 
 iz.15 against the Queen. 
 
 6,78 
 
 1 v 1 
 
 1 ,46 against the King. 
 2,19 
 
 Assuming that no one of the minor pieces is 
 more likely than another to remain on the board ; 
 nor that any exchangeable piece is more likely 
 to remain than the Queen, farther than the 
 ratio which two pieces in a class bear to one, 
 the equation of these values is ,82. 
 
 The KNIGHT receives, in the present article, 
 an occasional value for his VAULTING ACTION, 
 derived from the manner in which it operates on 
 an enemy. It takes uniformly from the assailed 
 the alternative of covering. The inverse effect 
 of a vaulting transit, almost exempting the 
 piece from obstruction, has already influenced 
 the account. 
 
 The Knight can exert ,5 of the Dislodging 
 Faculty ~,16 on the Pawn; against every 
 other class, the integer or 1. The Knight does 
 not go en prise, with any piece assailed ; con- 
 sequently the Transitive Attack is never delayed 
 by providing support in respect to the object 
 6,01. 
 
 The different classes, disturbed by the Knight, 
 
 may,
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 165 
 
 may, from new seats, act on the square already 
 battered or defended : 
 
 The pawn ----- 
 
 bishop 1,73 
 
 rook 2,31 
 
 queen - 4,7 
 
 king 2. 
 
 Therefore, . - =~,96 against the Pawn. 
 
 1x6 ' 01 = 3,47 against the Bishop. 
 
 1, I O 
 
 J^ 01 = 2,6 against the Rook. 
 
 /iJ,ol 
 
 zz 1,28 against the Queen, 
 
 4,7 
 
 1x6,01 . , ., ^. 
 
 -1 3, against the King. 
 
 ta 
 
 The equation of these values is 2,83. 
 
 Directed on the Pawn, the BISHOP has Dis- 
 lodging Power := ,33 =: ,089; against the 
 Knight, 5 = ,43. Played on the Rook ^i 1 . 
 On the Queen, ,75. On the King, 5. The 
 Bishop assails the Pawn without going en prise, 
 except from two squares in front $ its Power 
 
 w3 of
 
 166 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 of Transitive Attack, thus abridged, = 4,47. 
 As the Knight, or Rook, does not reflect its 
 action, the same power 6,47 is in full ratio 
 against either. To attack the Queen, the piece 
 requires support ; therefore 3, 235. As it can- 
 not independently check the King in collision, 
 the same ~ 4,94. As the Bishop acts but on 
 half the field, in applying these quantities -t-2. 
 
 Removing from the Bishop's stroke, the dif- 
 ferent classes may continue bearing on the same 
 object from new positions : 
 
 The pawn - - - 0, 
 knight - - 0, 
 rook ..... 2,38 
 queen ----- 3,64 
 king ----- 1,74 
 Therefore, 
 
 ,089x4,47-r-2 100 . ., 
 
 ' -- L- - =,199 against the Pawn. 
 
 ,43x6,47-7-2 , . 
 
 1 - -^ - 1,4 against the Knight. 
 
 - ' "** = ,1,36 against the Rook. 
 
 ,75x3,235^2 _ QQ L^ m 
 o~T =,33 against the Queen.
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 167 
 
 5x4,94-~2 ... ?] . t th Ki 
 
 1,74 
 
 The equation of these values is 1,05. 
 
 The ROOK has the measure , 33 of Dis- 
 lodging Force against the Pawn, in value, 
 ,,057 ; the quantity, 5 against the Knight, ,274 ; 
 and the same against the Bishop, ,32. The 
 proportion that may affect the Queen ,75; the 
 King-,5. 
 
 No previous possession of the field by the 
 Pawn, Knight, or Bishop, excludes the Rook 
 from the same rank or file. Consequently the 
 Power of Transitive Attack-^- 11-^ is not to be 
 modified in respect to either. It must be mo- 
 dified to 5,5 against the Queen, because the 
 assailant depends on a comrade. Against the 
 King, deducting for aid to check in contact, 
 the same power=:9,25. 
 
 The enemy may take new posts and preserve 
 the same bearing : 
 
 The pawn - 
 
 knight - - - - 
 bishop - - - - 1,7$ 
 queen ----- 3,3 
 
 king - - - 1,5. 
 
 Therefore, jQ57xlt = ,627 against the Pawn.. 
 *i 4 ,274
 
 168 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 ' ' = 3, against the Knight, 
 
 = 2, against the Bishop. 
 1,76 
 
 ?75x5j5 = 1,25 against the Queen. 
 3,3 
 
 j5x9 ' f<?5 = 3,07 against the King, 
 1,5 
 
 The equation of these values, is, 2,9. 
 
 The QUEEN'S degree of Dislodging Force 
 against the Pawn,~,33 ; reduced according 
 to the Pawn's inferior value, ,031. Against 
 the minor pieces, ,5. Reduced in respect to 
 the Knight,=,15. To the Bishop, =,176. To 
 the Rook, ~,276. The measure is ,5 against 
 the King. 
 
 The power of Transitive Attack, on the 
 Pawn, modified by the Pawn's range of action, 
 =21,9. On the Knight undiminished =,23,9. 
 On the Bishop, abridged by a partial reciprocity 
 of move, =16,6; on the Rook, restricted from 
 a similar cause, = 13,38. On the King, inde- 
 pendent of support =17,34+3,28 within the 
 King's range together =20,62. 
 
 The
 
 SCALE OP POWERS. 169 
 
 The piece disturbed, may attack, or defend, 
 the same square from new points : 
 The pawn --- - - 0, 
 knight ----- 0, 
 bishop --- - 1,65 
 rook ..... 2,17 
 king --- - - 1,1 
 
 Therefore, jOSI ^ 81 ' 9 =,68 against the Pawn. 
 
 
 
 = 3,58 against the Knight. 
 
 >* theBishop. 
 
 2,76x 13,38 
 
 - b 1,7 = >* against the Rook. 
 ,i i 
 
 ,5x20,62 Q 
 
 - - = 9,37 against the King. 
 
 *!" 
 
 The equation of these values is 4,74. 
 
 The results add to the comparative value of 
 the two weakest pieces ; 
 
 The Pawn --- - ,82 
 Knight - - - 2,83 
 Bishop - - - 1,05 
 Rook - - - - 2,9 
 ftueen - - - 4,7-f. 
 
 VII.
 
 170 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 VII. 1. Extra Points of Support. 2. Covering 
 Value of the Pawn. 3. Dcpendancc of the 
 Pawn. 4. Capacity of Promotion. 5. Estimate 
 cf the Rooks' Pawns. 6. United, separated, 
 and doubled Pawns. 
 
 To prevent multiplying titles for qualities 
 which are either peculiar to one class, or not 
 general, and which have not been comprehended 
 in the preceding titles, six distinct articles are 
 thrown into this. 
 
 1. From inadequacy of value in exchange, 
 sometimes flow EXTRA POINTS OF SUPPORT. 
 
 The PAWN resting itself upon a firm 
 point, and not restrained from reprisal by a 
 masked attack on some party which it covers 
 can support a pawn against two pieces ; be- 
 cause the two pawns are worth less than a 
 piece =2. Hence part of the advantage of 
 keeping pawns on contiguous files. 
 
 For a parallel reason, the Pawn can com- 
 monly support a knight against two rooks, or 
 rook and queen or king = 1,7 ; which sum re- 
 presents the probability of two rooks or a rook 
 and queen being left among four exchangeable 
 pieces. So can support a bishop; something 
 less positively in proportion to the greater value 
 of a pawn and bishop = 1,5. 
 
 Can
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 171 
 
 Can support a. rook against the queen standing 
 before a rook or bishop = 1,12 ; which sum re- 
 presents both the probability of a queen's 
 remaining among four exchangeable pieces, and 
 the piece whose combination depends on the 
 contingency ; which must be reduced to ,56 
 on account of the equal recurrence of an inverse 
 order in the attacking pieces. 
 
 Can support any minor piece against the 
 king and queen = 1,12. It is plain, that this 
 Extra Support must frequently respect only a 
 momentary relation ; but a move will at least 
 be gained; so that a greater force is disposable 
 for the succeeding stroke. 
 
 2 + 1,7 + 1,5 + ,56 -;- 1,12 = 6,88. 
 
 As any piece supports a partisan against a 
 single enemy, half this sum = 3,41 is the total 
 of extra points derived from the counter disad- 
 vantage of taking in exchange for a piece 
 two pawns or a pawn and a piece more than a 
 pawn inequivalent. 
 
 1 extra point of support relates to 1 ad- 
 joining pawn, that on the opposite hand being 
 assumed to have been exchanged, and is afford- 
 ed by 1 ray of action. 5 places on the file 
 countervail the probability of the pawn's stand- 
 ing ready. 
 
 2,44
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 extra points relate promiscuously to the 
 defence of 3 minor pieces, and may be afforded 
 alternately by 2 rays of action. 64 squares in 
 the field countervail the probability of the 
 pawn's standing appositely. The opportunity for 
 service also decreases with the number of classes 
 against which this support is valid = 2,7 in- 
 cluding the king. Therefore, 
 
 ixlxl 2,44 x 3 x 2 32 
 b ~ 64 x 5 -H 2,7 " 
 
 The KNIGHT can support a pawn against two 
 rooks, or rook and queen or king =: 1,7. A 
 bishop against the queen standing before a 
 bishop or before a rook == 1,12 -, 56. So a 
 rook = ,56. Any 'minor piece against the king 
 and queen = 1,12. Exclude the associate 
 knight, as the calculation is on half the set. 
 
 1,7 + ,56 + ,56 + 1,12 = 3,94 -=- 2 = 1,97. 
 
 ,85 extra points relate to 4 pawns against 
 2,7 pieces out of 5 classes. 1,12 point relates 
 to 3 pieces against 1,56 piece. Therefore, 
 ,85 x 4 x 6,01 l,12x 3 x 6,01 .93 
 ~6i X 5 -7- 2,7 64 X 5 -h 1,1* 
 
 The BISHOP yields the same; increased ac- 
 cording to its Power of Transitive. Defence
 
 1 
 SCALE OP POWERS. 173 
 
 = ,245; something less positively in proportion 
 to its value = ,21. 
 
 The ROOK can support a pawn against the 
 queen standing before a rook or bishop = ,56. 
 So a knight = ,56. And a bishop ,56. And 
 either against the king and queen = 1,12. 
 
 ,56+,56+,56+ 1,12= 2,8-7-2= 1,4. 
 
 ,28 extra points relate to 4 pawns against 
 ,84 class. 1,12 relates to 2 pieces against the 
 same contingent combination. Therefore, 
 ,14x4x11 ^56x2x11 _ 
 
 " 
 
 The results are : 
 
 Pawn, ..... S2 
 
 Knight ----- ,23 
 
 Bishop --- - - ,21 
 
 Rook, ----- y 05 
 
 The whole of this article is against the 
 QUEEN. 
 
 2. The Pawn, as remarked in title VI. has 
 alone a COVERING VALUE. It is not easily 
 forced, when standing before the King. When 
 restricted to a covering post, its range of local 
 action is in exercise ; it furnishes a point of 
 support to other pieces ; and even the function 
 of transitive attack is suspended in a degree 
 
 onlv.
 
 174* INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 only. When the office of protection is no longer 
 necessary, or when it can be discharged consist- 
 ently with the advance of the pawns, they come 
 into the field as a reserve. 
 
 While the adverse queen is on the board, the 
 minor pieces cannot move freely, unless the king 
 be kept in a station unexposed to check. 
 
 Even the exchangeable pieces require some 
 fortified points, behind which they may either 
 prepare to act in combination, or retire from 
 annoyance. Let us suppose all the pawns on 
 one side to be lost for five pawns and a knight ; 
 that the king with the three pawns is protected 
 by their compact station ; and that the other 
 forces of each party remain. It is plain, that 
 the queen without pawns has not her field en- 
 larged, but essentially abridged by the openness 
 of the board. She must not, commonly, stand 
 on the same open diagonal, or rank or file with 
 the king. This is an exclusion from nearly a 
 third of the board; and, under the circum- 
 stances stated, it would be scarcely possible 
 ta prevent the uncovered king, in retreat from 
 the repeated checks of two rooks and two 
 bishops, from doubling on the same line. 
 
 The rooks are the pieces deriving most ad- 
 vantage from open files, while the remaining 
 forces exceed the capacity of the field. This 
 
 will
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 175 
 
 will be illustrated if we conceive the idea of 
 eight rooks ranged on one side against eight queens. 
 It is evident, that the action of the rooks fills 
 the whole board, and that the eighth queen 
 is worth no more than the eighth rook, because 
 she has not a place to stand upon. 
 
 The centre pawns are the most valuable, be- 
 cause, advanced to the fourth or fifth square, 
 they cover, from diagonal attacks, the unmoved 
 pawns which cover the castled king. In their pas- 
 sage across the board, their service is greater 
 than that of other pawns, in excluding adverse 
 action, and in leaving in their rear protected 
 lines on which their partisans can form or rally. 
 
 The king's pawn and queens pawn covers, each, 
 on the average 11,4 squares; a bishop's pawn 
 9,7 ; a knight's pawn 9. The equation for the 
 six centre pawns n 10,03. 
 
 F 10,0'* _ lr 
 Therefore i- - ,!(>. 
 
 6-i 
 
 3. The DEPENDANCE OF THE PAWN FOR 
 SUPPORT FROM PIECES is more constant than 
 their obligation to the Pawn for protection. 
 One pawn, it is true, can support another : but 
 the safety of a single pawn, or of the last in a 
 chain depends on the aid of apiece, when it is at- 
 tacked by the king, or queen, or rook, so as to 
 
 command
 
 176 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 command the next square in its transit. The 
 knight, or bishop, cannot so attack the pawn as 
 to command the next square; and can merely 
 intercept an unsupported pawn, or force it when 
 something distinct intercepts it. 
 
 This Dcpendance of the Pawn for support, 
 seems to give an unmoved Rook opposed to 
 two bodies of three pawns of which one in 
 each division shall have advanced two squares, 
 a proportion of power something greater than 
 the proportion in the consolidated scale, title 
 IX. If the kings be at their original seats, 
 that party appears mostly to win which has the 
 move. 
 
 As this Dependancy for support arises from 
 the limitation of the transit, so the Knight has 
 a share of this relative weakness, that is to say, 
 it may be so attacked by a single piece in some 
 positions, that, although the field be open it 
 cannot save itself by removing. Lolli has 
 shewn*, that the Knight standing unsupported 
 in any angle of the board must fall to the king 
 attacking diagonally; and to the queen at- 
 tacking from any adjoining square; and stand- 
 ing unsupported at some other part of the mar- 
 
 * Osser-cazioni Teorico.praliche sopra il Giuoco degli 
 Scacchi. Bologna, 1763. p. 417.
 
 SCALE OP POWERS. 177 
 
 gin, or a single square from the margin of the 
 board,, must fall to the queen attacking close 
 in front. Both the rook and bishop may con- 
 fine the Knight in some relations on the open 
 board; but, singly, cannot force it. 
 
 I conceive these peculiarities in the Pawn and 
 Knight not to demand any deduction from the 
 consolidated measure of their different powers; 
 because those powers include the range of 
 transit, and the ordinary distance moved, which 
 have been already represented by sums propor- 
 tionally small. 
 
 In a diagonal chain of Pawns, the want of 
 radical support is frequently counterbalanced 
 by the Capacity of Promotion ; so that the pawn 
 in the van, though unable to advance without 
 loss, shall deter the king or other piece from 
 taking that in the rear. , 
 
 4. The Pawn's CAPACITY OF PROMOTION 
 has always a dormant value. But this gives 
 the piece no increased ability to reach the ul- 
 timate rank, which must be attained entirely 
 through facilities for its progress and support 
 as a pawn. When it can be certainly calculated 
 that the pawn will either replace a piece, or cost 
 the adversary a piece to prevent it, the Capacity 
 of Promotion has a positive value. 
 
 VOL. i. N The
 
 178 INTRODUCTION TO CtfESS. 
 
 The player who sacrifices a knight to take 
 three pawns, gains as much more than the 
 knight, as the opening of three files for as many 
 pawns is worth : and, unless the adversary be in 
 a position to draw some immediate advantage from 
 the superiority of a piece, will generally win. 
 
 A player who is strong in pieces in proportion 
 as he is weak in pawns, may oftener succeed by 
 bold offensive play, indirectly aiming at the 
 pawns, than by levelling combinations princi- 
 pally against them : because a pawn en prise 
 with a knight or bishop, or with a rook at- 
 tacking sideways, liberates itself by moving ; 
 so that although the pieces assailing connected 
 pawns shall exceed by one the number defending 
 them, rt is difficult to make the superiority bear 
 on an individual. As far as practicable, the 
 last pawn in an adverse chain, should be blocked 
 by one of the pieces attacking it. 
 
 A pawn may, by position, be worth a knight 
 more than a queen. 
 
 5. Each ROOK'S PAWN, estimated on the 
 principles which have been applied to the other 
 files, is worth about two-thirds of the sum 
 placed against the pawn in the first consolidated 
 scale or ,67 in the second scale, where the 
 value of a pawn with two rays of action = 1. 
 
 6. PAWN*
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 179 
 
 6 D . PAWNS UNITED on any of the six central 
 files will generally support the ratio set down 
 in the scale, independent of a value for the ca- 
 pacity of promotion. 
 
 A SEPARATED PAWN, as it cannot furnish 
 extra points of support to another, nor derive 
 any service from the dislodging faculty of ano- 
 ther, while its dependance on pieces for aid is 
 greater than subsists in the close relation first 
 given to the pawns, must lose by isolation one 
 fifth of its ordinary value. This disadvantage 
 may, under peculiar circumstances, be com- 
 pensated by some independent facility in queen- 
 ing, or use in combination. 
 
 The king's, or queen's pawn, separately con- 
 sidered, is seldom worth more than a bishop's 
 pawn; or rather the king's bishop's, is prized 
 when the resource of castling is taken under 
 cover of it, equally with the king's ; and in 
 other cases, it may force an exchange with the 
 adverse king's pawn. As the queen's bishop's, 
 commonly supports and replaces the queen's, it 
 is almost identified in value with it. The knight's 
 pawn seems to be no otherwise inferior to these, 
 than as it does not, when moved out, cover so 
 much of the section from diagonal attack. 
 
 A PAWN DOUBLED, or transposed to the van 
 or rear of another in making a capture, is the 
 
 N 2 most
 
 180 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 most detrimental on a rook's file; and the least 
 so when a rook's pawn passes to the knight's 
 file, provided the king be in a different section. 
 Two pawns doubled and isolated, are rarely 
 worth one and a quarter. If the doubled pawns 
 cooperate with one contiguous y the loss of half a 
 pawn may be divided among the three; and 
 sometimes they are not inferior to three spread 
 out. See First Essay, Diagram p. 110. and 
 Philidor's Analysis, First Party; note (z). 
 
 VIII. Circumscribing Faculty. Value in Com- 
 bination. Mating Power. 
 
 The Faculty of circumscribing the King in 
 space without giving a stale, resides in no single 
 piece besides the Rook and Queen. It flows 
 from the range of action; and would not re- 
 quire a distinct estimate, could the King be 
 played like an exchangeable piece. When the 
 adverse king is not covered by his pieces, it is 
 subservient to prescribing a position to him, 
 and to giving mate. 
 
 The Rook, unsupported, can send out two 
 lines of impassable space : but when the adverse 
 king attacks it, must abandon one, = 1. Re- 
 duced to the General Range of Action n ,75. 
 
 It requires two BISHOPS on adjoining dia- 
 gonals
 
 SCALE OP POWERS. 181 
 
 gonals to send out such a line = 1. The pro- 
 portion of a single piece = ,5. Reduced = ,44. 
 
 The QUEEN, acting as a Rook, unsupported 
 against the King, can maintain, at right angles, 
 two impassable lines, because the Bishop's 
 range in her action prevents the King from 
 approaching to disturb her = 2. Reduced = 
 . ,4. The diagonal raj is thus included. 
 
 To the King, already in an angle, two 
 KNIGHTS may be opposed so as to confine him 
 without giving a stale: but this is measuring 
 their strength on partial ground. The King 
 should be neither in an angle, nor at the margin 
 of the board, but moving freely in an open 
 section before the circumscribing property is 
 exerted. It requires two KNIGHTS and two 
 PAWNS, to present impassable points of space, 
 which ranging together shall form a complete 
 line. Not as a specimen of play against an 
 unattended king, but to measure the fraction of 
 a quality , Let the king be moving freely on 
 the second rank of his own section; place the 
 counter bishop's pawns forward within the 
 extent of two moves, either abreast, or one 
 advanced a square beyond the other; and let 
 the knights stand on their files obliquely in the 
 rear of the pawns. The line formed is no 
 better than that presented by a single rook = 1. 
 
 N 3 Which
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 Which, distributed among the confederates, = 
 ,24 for x the pawns; z: ,76 for the knights; 
 = ,12 for a single pawn; ir ,38 for a knight. 
 The relation of ,38 to the Bishop's proportion 
 is confirmed by noticing, that when a knight 
 and bishop combine to give mate, the former 
 consumes eleven moves, the latter no more than 
 nine. As this faculty regards a crisis, it cannot 
 be presumed to be exercised more than once in 
 a well-played game. With respect to a com- 
 bination entirely of small pieces to circum- 
 scribe the adverse king, it would consume too 
 many moves : but when, in consequence of pre- 
 vious operations, they possess opportune faci- 
 lities to act with capital forces, their part in 
 the concert will be proportioned to the results : 
 
 The pawn ,12 
 
 knight ,38 
 
 bishop ----- ,44 
 
 rook ------ ,75 
 
 queen ----- 1,4. 
 
 IN COMBINATION, the value of a piece will 
 sometimes participate in the value of the su- 
 perior with which it cooperates. Thus a bishop 
 and rook win against a rook. When a piece 
 can return support, the value of one ray of 
 Action will be doubled. The relation of mu-, 
 
 tual
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 
 
 support- will occur, in proportion as a 
 piece partakes the mode in which another acts. 
 Thus the pawn has a slender affinity with the 
 bishop and queen. The knight with no other 
 piece ; nor can a knight support a knight, when 
 ;the offensive action of both is directed to the 
 same point : but their mutual support for mere 
 defence is not easily dissolved by a superior. 
 The bishop combines well with the pawn de- 
 fensively ; and with the queen in attack. The 
 rook with the queen; and no piece so well 
 with one of its own class. The queen sup- 
 ported against the king, returns support, ex- 
 cept to the knight. The increase in the force 
 of a piece by combination, will generally cor- 
 respond with the ratio of its separate value. 
 
 The MATING POWER is to be considered 
 either with respect to a contested field; or to 
 that stage in which a remnant of force is acting 
 against a single king. Unless ithe chief object 
 .of attack be impeded by his own men, it requires 
 at least two cooperating pieces to give mate. 
 The force of the check, in limiting the king's 
 retreat, or denying him any, depends upon the 
 number of contiguous points which the rays of 
 action can touch, taking the position of the 
 checked king a$ one point, and counting every 
 
 N 4 square.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 square in contact which the piece equally com- 
 mands. The Queen's eminent strength is dis- 
 played as much in giving mate, as in the field 
 of capture and reprisal. To enable any other 
 piece to effect the decisive stroke, a greater 
 number of facilities, arising either from the 
 cooperation of partizans, or the obstruction of 
 the adverse king by his own pieces, must con- 
 spire in proportion to the assailant's class. As 
 the Knight cannot check in contact; so it is 
 the only piece, which can give a smothered mate 
 properly so called. 
 
 When an unattended king is to be mated, 
 the Queen has a surplus of power. The Rook 
 can give the same mate less expeditiously. It 
 might be expected that any two minor pieces 
 whose coadded powers equalled the power of 
 the Rook should also decide the game against 
 a single king. It remains to be explained, 
 why two Knights want something of the ne- 
 cessary force. Any definite quantity of power 
 divided between two pieces, when exerted for 
 defence, is more difficult to overcome than the 
 same quantity in an individual, because two 
 distinct points may be supported. But in 
 offence,, the advantage is inverted; because the 
 attacking force is transported in half the number 
 
 of
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 185 
 
 of moves, so that the assailed has less time to 
 manoeuvre for escape. Another reason applying 
 peculiarly to the knight compared with the 
 rook, is, that in proportion as the board is 
 open, the rook has a more extensive range ; and 
 the knight's vaulting motion is a diminished 
 benefit ; for which one sixth may be added to 
 the relative power of the rook. 
 
 It appears from a situation submitted, as a 
 problem*, to LOLLI by his learned friend 
 TARUFFI, Professor of Philosophy, Medicine, 
 and the Belles Lettres at Bologna, that two 
 Knights can give mate, provided the king 
 confined to defence have a pawn which the 
 stronger party can manage, or may neglect, 
 while preparing to mate. The pawn must be 
 at liberty whenever its king cannot move ; and 
 it must not be requisite to take it to prevent 
 it from queening. Otherwise the knights can- 
 not press with their chief on the enemy so as to 
 win, but may easily give a stale. 
 
 To mate the king, as his position- be in the 
 angle, or at the margin, or in the area of the 
 board, while his seat is battered, three, orjive, 
 
 * In the Work above quoted, p. 386. 
 
 or
 
 186 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 or eight contiguous points must be BLOCKED 
 or COMMANDED. No single piece can attack 
 the king, and command every point in his 
 transit. Hence the mating property is a com- 
 bination of the powers of Transitive Attack and 
 Range of Action exerted by two pieces or more. 
 To mate alone is not a property, but an accident, 
 
 IX. Consolidated Scales. 
 
 The powers which have been separately found 
 for each piece, require to be added together, 
 as they result under the titles III. General 
 range of action IV. General facility of transit 
 -V. Power of transitive attack VI-. Dislodging 
 faculty VII. Extra points of support, includ- 
 ing the covering value of the pawn VIII. Cir- 
 cumscribing power. 
 
 Pawn 
 
 Knight 
 
 Bishop 
 
 Rook 
 
 Queen 
 
 2, 
 
 5,25 
 
 7,3 
 
 10,52 
 
 17,18 
 
 1, 
 
 4,92 
 
 7,02 
 
 9,96 
 
 16,59 
 
 2, 
 
 6,01 
 
 6,47 
 
 Mi 
 
 23,9 
 
 ,82 
 
 2,83 
 
 1,05 
 
 2,9 
 
 4,74 
 
 ,32 
 
 ,23 
 
 ,21 
 
 ,05 
 
 .... 
 
 ,16 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 " 
 
 ,12 
 
 ,38 
 
 ,44 
 
 ,75 
 
 1,4 
 
 r 6,42 
 
 19,62 j 
 
 22,49 
 
 35jl8 
 
 63,81 
 
 III, 
 
 IV. 
 
 V. 
 
 VI. 
 
 VII. 
 VIII. 
 
 FIRST
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 187 
 
 FIRST CONSOLIDATED SCALE. 
 
 If the totals just obtained, be divided by 
 2,805 the ratio which the open range of the queen 
 bears to the total flowing from that basis, the 
 scale will have a common relation to the ca- 
 pacity of the field. 
 
 Pawn 2,29. 
 
 knight -7, 
 
 bishop 8, 
 
 rook 12,5 
 
 queen 22,75. 
 
 The capacity of the field is 64. The forces 
 originally on the board, amount to 190,14. 
 Consequently, while they remain entire, the 
 two parties act in a space not exceeding one 
 third of the range of the whole. This most 
 represses the capital pieces. Till the two sets 
 are attenuated by exchanges to 106, the 
 Knight will have a comparative power slightly 
 exceeding that in the tables. 
 
 SECOND CONSOLIDATED SCALE. 
 
 It will simplify the proportions, to use the ' 
 quantity of the pawn as a common divisor, 
 tli us making the smallest sum a unit. 
 
 Pawn
 
 188 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 Pawn 1, 
 
 knight - - - - 3,05 
 bishop - - 3,5 
 
 rook 5,48 
 
 queen ----- 9,94. 
 
 The rook's pawn is commonly worth no more 
 than ,67. The value " \" common to one of 
 the six centre pawns, has been calculated on the 
 assumption, that a pawn remains on one of the 
 adjoining files. The value may be much aug- 
 mented by facilities for the promotion of the 
 pawn; and it may be diminished by isolation, 
 and by being doubled on another pawn, as has 
 been particularly stated in title VII. 4. 6. 
 
 As the knight and bishop are indifferently 
 exchanged by the best players, the slight ge- 
 neral superiority which has come out for the 
 comparative value of the bishop, may appear 
 to controvert experience. How shall we re- 
 concile the theory with the practice ? A solution 
 is found in the simple worth of a move. A 
 knight can seldom attack a bishop without 
 making at least two moves: Now if the 
 bishop have made but one, should an exchange 
 succeed, the difference in value taken has cost 
 a move. Adverting to the same expense to 
 save this difference in value, Unless the bishop 
 
 be
 
 SCALE OF POWERS. 189 
 
 be wanted for a specific purpose which can be 
 effected in a new position, it is rarely expedient 
 to withdraw it from the attack of a knight, 
 especially if the assailed be already supported. 
 On the contrary, if a bishop travel in pursuit 
 of exchange with a knight, so that the balance 
 of a move is against the player, it is generally 
 attended with some detriment. A move is in- 
 valuable in a decisive position; but the worth 
 of a move is not easily measured prior to any 
 other advantage. The difference between a 
 knight and a bishop, is nearly half a pawn; 
 and practice indicates this to be the worth of a 
 move. 
 
 PHILIDOR'S practical display of comparative 
 force, vol. ii. p. 279, confirms the scale, a* 
 qualified under title VIII. MATING POWER. 
 The following propositions, equally ascertained 
 by experiment, are from LOLLI: but, like all 
 general rules, are liable to exception, when 
 there is some distinct advantage or disadvantage 
 arising from position. 
 
 INDECISIVE DISPARITIES. 
 
 A rook drarss the game against two knights and * 
 bishop. 
 
 Two knights, or a bishop and a knight, draw against a 
 rook and a bishop. 
 
 Two
 
 190 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 Two bishops draw against the queen, provided their king 
 be in an angle, aqd they cover and rest upon him. 
 Two rooks draw against the queen and a bishop. 
 
 DECISIVE DISPARITIES. 
 
 The queen wins against two knights, or against a knight 
 and a bishop. 
 
 Two rooks rein against two knights, or against a knight 
 and a bishop, or against two bishops. 
 
 Two rooks with a bishop, or with a knight, win against 
 the queen. 
 
 Tie
 
 The remaining Models in the INTRODUCTION, 
 are from Italian and other Masters, whose 
 Names are subjoined. This Acknowledgment 
 is due to the Inventor or Enlarger of each Ex* 
 ample. The Notes are partly derived from 
 GIAMBATISTA LOLLI, and partly supplied ty 
 tJie Writer of the Introduction. 
 
 jFouttfr
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 FROM LOLLI, p. 140. 
 
 1. 
 
 W. King's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square*. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. a. bishop to Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 B. Q. knight to d. bishop's 3d (a}. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to the king's 3d. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. bishop to K. knight's 2d. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K. knight to K. bishop's 3d. 
 B. The same. 
 
 * The error of the Black consists in this opening, which is 
 not to be imitated, because it is unsafe. 
 
 (a) In the first Back Game, K. B.paivn 2 squares. 
 
 7. W.
 
 FOURTH ESSAY. 193 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. bishop's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. The White 
 should castle on the queen's side ; and, 
 by advancing the pawns on the other 
 wing, he will have a safe game,, and a 
 good attack. 
 
 VOL, i. o FIRST
 
 194 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Third Move of the Black. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. K. bishop's pawn 2 squares. 
 
 [The White should answer this move by 
 pushing the K. &. pawn one square. Al- 
 though it may deceive a bad player to 
 take with the K. pawn, yet should the 
 Black, instead of playing as in the se- 
 cond back game, adopt the defence which 
 LOLLI has indicated, he will have the 
 better game.] 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The K. pawn takes the pawn. 
 K. The Q. bishop takes the K. kn. pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The queen gives check. 
 B. K. kn. pawn interposes. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The K. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. K. bishop to K. knight's 2d (6). 
 
 . (ft) IR the third Back Game, K. knight to K. bishop's 3d. 
 
 7.W.
 
 FOURTH ESSAY. 195 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The K. pawn takes the rook's pawn, dis- 
 covering check. 
 B. The king to his bishop's square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse K. knight's 3d. 
 B. The Q. bishop takes the rook. 
 
 9. 
 W. The pawn takes the knight, MAKING A 
 
 ROOK*, and giving check. 
 B. The rook takes the new-made rook. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. K. knight to the rook's 3d. 
 B. The queen to the king's square. The Black 
 has obtained a rook for a knight and 
 a pawn. 
 
 * Facendone un rocco. LOLLI* The rule laid down by 
 this able master is, that the queen will not admit a com. 
 panion in the field.
 
 196 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Sixth Move of the Black. 
 
 6. 
 B. K. knight to K. bishop's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The K. pawn takes the rook's pawn, dis- 
 covering- check. 
 B. The knight takes the queen. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The K. bishop to adverse K. knight's 3d, 
 giving check-mate. 
 
 LOLLI derives this branch of the 
 game from GRECO. 
 
 JFiftfr
 
 FIFTH ESSAY. 197 
 
 JFiftfj 
 
 LOLLI, p. 141, quotes SALvio/or this example 
 it is also in GRECO. 
 
 1. 
 
 W. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The king's pawn 1 square*. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. K. hishop to the queen's 3d. 
 B. K. bishop to the king's 2d (a). 
 
 4. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The same. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 * This step is radically bad, 
 
 (a) GRECO makes the Black check first with this bishop, 
 and on the White's interposing the pawn, seat the bishop 
 Jiere. 
 
 P3 0. W.
 
 198 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. K. knight to the queen's 4th. 
 
 7. 
 W. The K. bishop takes the rook's pawn, 
 
 checking. 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The K. knight gives check. 
 B. The king to his knight's square (I). 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The K. bishop takes the knight. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The K. r. pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. K. b. pawn % squares. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The doubled pawn 1 square. 
 B. The queen may protract the mate one hope- 
 less turn, by sacrificingherself. GRECO 
 has been closely followed after the 
 fifth move, because he castles as in 
 England. 
 
 (6) If the bishop now take the knight, the king, on the 
 discovered check, may go to his knight's 3d. He would 
 be mated at the 13th move, in the centre of the board.
 
 SIXTH ESSAY. 199 
 
 Gomito of DAMIANO from LOLLI, p. 245. 
 
 W. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square*. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. The K- knight takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d (a). 
 
 4. 
 
 W. K. knight returns to the bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn, checking. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The bishop interposes. The White has a 
 superior situation. 
 
 * A weak move ; and to support the king's pawn thus, 
 is mostly a perfidious expedient. However, the same move, 
 owing to a different relation, is good in the queen's Gambit, 
 and in one or two other cases to be discriminated by the 
 practised player. 
 
 (a) In the first back game, the bishop's pawn takes the 
 knight. 
 
 o 4 FIRST
 
 tOO INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Third Move of the Black. 
 
 3. 
 B. The K. b. pawn takes the knight. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The queen gives check. 
 B. The K. kn. pawn interposes (a). 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The queen takes the K. pawn, check- 
 ing. 
 B. The queen interposes. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The queen takes the rook. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d (6). 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn, giving check. 
 
 (a) In the second Back Game, the king to his second 
 square. 
 
 (6) If, instead, his queen takes the pawn checking, your 
 king retires to the queen's square. 
 
 8. W.
 
 SIXTH ESSAY. 201 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse knight's 4th (c). 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. knight to bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen takes the Q. b. pawn. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. knight to adverse queen's 4th. 
 B. The K. knight takes the bishop. 
 
 II. 
 
 W. The queen gives check. 
 B. The king to his queen's square. 
 
 12. 
 W. The queen gives check, at adverse K. 
 
 knight's 4th. 
 B. The king returns to his square. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The queen takes the knight, checking. 
 B. The king to his queen's square, or bishop's 
 3d. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The Q. rook to Q. bishop's square. In the 
 following variations, all the contest 
 lies in one angle or corner. Hence the 
 term Gomito. 
 
 ( c ) The Author of the Introduction has supplied the re. 
 maining moves. 
 
 SECOND
 
 202 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the Black in the preceding 
 Back Game. 
 
 4. 
 B. The king to his second square. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The queen takes the K. pawn, checking. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The K. bishop gives check. 
 B. The Q. pawn interposes (). 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the pawn, and checks. 
 B. The king to his knight's 3d. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The K. r. pawn checks. 
 B. The king to his rook's 3d. 
 
 (a) The conclusion is supplied from GRECO. Without 
 pursuing this step, LOLLI recommends it as a better de- 
 fence than that in the third back game. But to move the 
 king rather protracts his defeat. 
 
 10. W.
 
 SIXTH ESSAY. 203 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares, discovering check. 
 B. K. kn. pawn interposes. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The queen takes the rook, in GRECO ; and 
 gives an ingenious mate in four 
 moves afterwards. But, where pawns 
 are allowed to take in passing, the 
 rook's pawn should take, discovering 
 double check, and the mate will be 
 given two moves sooner. 
 
 THIRD
 
 204 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 THIRD BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Sixth Move of the Elack, in the Second 
 Back Game. 
 
 6. 
 B. The king to his knight's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 W. The queen to adverse K. bishop's 4th, 
 
 giving check*. 
 B. The king to his rock's 3d. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares, discovering check. 
 B. K. kn. pawn interposes. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The queen to the king's 3d (a). 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the pawn, checking. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 * Rui LOPEZ, a Spanish Writer, wins by playing, instead, 
 the K. r. pawn 2 squares. But LOLLI shews Damiano's 
 method to be more simple and expeditious. 
 
 (a) If, instead, he push the Q. pawn 2 squares, you ply 
 the queen to adverse K. bishop's 3d. 
 
 11. W.
 
 SIXTH ESSAY. 205 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the queen. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 12. 
 W. The queen checks, at adverse K. bishop's 
 
 2d. 
 B. The king removes. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The K. kn. pawn gives check. 
 B. The K. bishop takes it. 
 
 15. 
 W. The K. r. pawn takes the bishop, giving 
 
 and discovering check. 
 B. The king takes the pawn. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The K. rook checks, at adverse rook f s 4th. 
 B, The king to adverse knight's 4th. 
 
 17. 
 W. The K. bishop gives check-mate.
 
 20ft INTRODUCTION TO CHESB. 
 
 From the ANONYMOUS MODENESE, Lolli,p. 264. 
 The Black Moving first. 
 
 1. 
 
 JB. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 W, The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. K. knight to the bishop's 3d*. 
 W. Q. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 * LOLLI'S book is in effect a joint work; as it contains 
 a Practical Treatise of Defence against the Advantage of 
 the Move, by the ANONYMOUS MODENESE. These masters 
 term a party thus opened and defended, describing the first 
 three moves, the piano game. 
 
 At the second move, the following question demands an 
 answer : " When the king's pawn is attacked by the ad. 
 " Terse knight, should it be sustained by the queen's pawn, 
 " or by the queen's knight ; or, leaving it exposed, should 
 " the king's bishop's pawn be moved two squares ?" PHI. 
 LIDOR replies : " By the queen's pawn." See his Third Party ', 
 First Back Game, Corrected Variation. LOLLI and the 
 ANONYMOUS MODENESE answer : lt By the queen's knight." 
 See the present example. GRECO appears to rely on a distinct 
 countermove, " King's bishop's pawn two squares." See 
 the Eighth Essay in this Introduction. 
 
 3. B.
 
 SEVENTH ESSAY. 207 
 
 3. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. The same. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square, 
 W. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The K. pawn takes it. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The Q. b. pawn takes the pawn, 
 W. The K. bishop gives check. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop, checking. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. The Q. knight takes the bishop. 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The K. pawn takes the pawn (a). 
 W. The K. knight takes the pawn. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 W. Q. knight to the king's 2d. 
 
 The MODENESE pronounces this to be am 
 equal game. 
 
 (a) lp the JBack Game. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 BACK
 
 208 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Ninth Move of the Black. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. K. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The Q. pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The K. pawn takes the knight. 
 W. The queen takes the K. pawn. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The queen checks, at her king's 2d. 
 W. The queen interposes, at her king's 2d (6). 
 
 12. 
 
 B. The queen takes the queen, checking. 
 W. The knight takes the queen (c). 
 
 13. 
 
 B. The Q. knight takes the pawn. The isolated 
 pawn is perhaps rather more than 
 compensated by the forwardness of 
 the pieces : but there is no material 
 inequality. 
 
 (6) LOLLI is a correct player, yet no move should be 
 adopted from him without circumspection, on every side, 
 as it may depend on the latitude in his form of castling. 
 Thus he directs the queen's bishop to cover, which would 
 be immediately forced on an English board. 
 
 (c) Rather take with the king, as in Variation. 
 
 VARIATION
 
 SEVENTH ESSAV. 209 
 
 VARIATION 
 
 On the Sack Game. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The king takes the queen, 
 
 13. 
 
 B. The Q. knight takes the pawn. 
 W. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 W. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the bishop, 
 W. The knight checks ; and, next move, takes 
 the Q. rook. Circumstances are favour- 
 able for trying the strength of a rook 
 and a pawn against two knights. 
 
 - 
 
 VOL, I. P
 
 210 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 From GRECO. 
 
 '' 
 The Black moving first. 
 
 - 
 
 ,.K . ' 
 
 B' King's pawn 1 square. 
 W. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares*. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the pawn (a). 
 W. The queen to the king's 2d. 
 
 * If all the subsequent moves could be relied on as correct, 
 this example would prove, that there is a second valid de- 
 fence, and that the attack is not safe. But the Author of 
 the Introduction is inclined to think, that this ingenious 
 game must not b received as a guide, although it well 
 deserves to be examined. He has subjoined the sketch of a 
 variation. 
 
 (a) In the second Back Game, from GRECO, the K. pawn 
 takes. 
 
 4. B.
 
 EIGHTH ESSAY. 
 4. 
 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 
 W. The K. kn. pawn interposes. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the knight's pawn. 
 W. The queen takes the pawn, checking. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The K. bishop interposes (fcj. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d; 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. rook's 4th. 
 W. The queen takes the K. kn. pawn, 
 
 8. 
 
 B. The knight takes the rook. 
 W. The queen takes the rook, checking. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The K. bishop interposes. 
 W. The queen gives check. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 W. The K. b. pawn takes the queen. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4]th. 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 (6) In the first Back Game from GRECO, the king to the 
 gueetfs square. 
 
 p 2 >2. B.
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. knight's 3d. 
 W. K. bishop to K. knight's 2d. Must win a 
 piece.
 
 EIGHTH ESSAV. 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Sixth Move of the Black. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The king to the queen's square. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The queen to the K. rook's 4th. 
 W. The K. r. pawn takes the knight* 
 
 8. 
 
 B. The queen takes the rook. 
 W. The K. knight to adverse knight's 4th. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The queen returns to her K. rook's 4th. 
 W. The knight gives check, at adverse king's 
 3d. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the knight. 
 W. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 
 
 p 3 SECONO
 
 214- INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Third Move of the Black. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. The K. pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 W. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. Q. pawn J square. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. K. knight to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. Q. knight to Q. rook's 3d. 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. K. bishop to the knight's 2d. [He should 
 rather play the K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 See Sketch of a variation.^ 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 9. B.
 
 EIGHTH ESSAY. 215 
 
 / 
 
 9. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. bishop to the knight's 2d. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. The knight takes the Q. pawn. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. Q,. knight to the queen's 2d. 
 W. K. bishop to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 13. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. The Q. knight takes the knight. 
 W. GRECO directs the pawn to take the Q. kn. 
 pawn, discovering check, and after- 
 wards wins by a long train of moves. 
 But if the white, instead, push the 
 pawn on the queen, discovering check, 
 he must immediately win the queen 
 for a bishop. 
 
 p 4 SKETCH
 
 316 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESI. 
 
 SKETCH OF A VARIATION, 
 
 In the second BACK GAME, on the Eighth Move of the 
 Black. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares (a). 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the knight. 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen to the king's 2d. 
 W. The K. bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 (d) It appears that yon have not a better more ; for 
 
 8. 
 W. Q. knight to the queen's 4th. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The K. bishop takes the pawn. 
 W. Q. bishop to the knight's 2d. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The queen gives check, at adverse K. rook's 4th, and has 
 obviously the best game. 
 
 11. B.
 
 EIGHTH ESSAY* 217 
 
 11. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. knight to the queen's 2d. 
 
 13. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. Or, as below. 
 W. Q. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to the king's 3d. 
 W. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 
 The first player has gained a knight for 
 a pawn ; but not without losing some- 
 thing in position. 
 
 Or, 
 
 13. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the pawn. 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. The queen takes the pawn. 
 W. Q. rook to the queen's square. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The queen takes the Q. pawn. Or, as below. 
 W. Q. knight to the king's 4th. 
 
 16. B.
 
 218 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS, 
 
 16. 
 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 W. The Q. b. pawn interposes. 
 
 17. 
 
 B. The queen to adverse Q. rook's 4th. 
 W. The Q. knight checks, at adverse K. bishop *s 
 3d. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. The king to his 2d square, 
 W. Q. bishop to K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. K. bishop to the knight's 2d. 
 W. The queen to her 3d square. 
 
 This is not so well for the first player as 
 the preceding. 
 
 Or, 
 
 15. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The K. pawn takes the Q. pawn, in passing. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. The K. bishop takes the pawn. 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 17. 
 
 B. The queen takes the bishop. 
 W. The knight to his king's 4th. 
 
 18. B.
 
 EIGHTH ESSAY. 219 
 
 18. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. knight's 3d. 
 W. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The knight to his K. knight's 3d. 
 
 This seems to be nearly even. 
 
 Conclusion*
 
 Conclusion, 
 
 IN the former edition of this work, the 
 author took occasion to introduce, with a game 
 of PHI LID OR, some observations on the critical 
 situations, into which an inexperienced player 
 may get, from attempting that master's mode 
 of managing the pawns, on account of the 
 address and ability which a successful pursuit 
 of it requires. The difficulty is, should the 
 adversary abandon the direct mode of opposition 
 with his own pawns, to guard against the fa- 
 cility which he thereby obtains, of employing 
 a great number of pieces in forcing the position 
 of, your king. This inconvenience is to be pre- 
 vented, without relinquishing the defence of 
 the pawns, or ultimately failing in their pro- 
 motion, but there is danger, in pursuing any 
 plan intensely, of acquiring a manner. The 
 judicious player will avail himself of the mas- 
 terly instructions which PHILIDOR gives for 
 the conduct of the pawns ; without reposing on 
 his system on all occasions ; adopting such modes 
 of it as are proved to involve no defeat when 
 scientifically counteracted ; and obstructing, or 
 
 conniving
 
 CONCLUSION. 221 
 
 conniving at its trial on himself, (so far as is 
 consistent with preserving a position at least 
 equal,) as it is the forte or the failing of the 
 person who would practise it. The models of 
 CUNNINGHAM and SALVIO, requiring great 
 stores of resource to prevent the adventurer 
 from suffering by enterprise, will in practice 
 be equally delicate to follow. The spirit of 
 these accomplished specimens is what you should 
 endeavour to seize. In opposition to any pro- 
 ject, to adhere invariably to the routine of 
 moves in the best treatises is ineligible; for 
 instance, if you were to imitate exactly the se- 
 cond mover in the first party of PHI LI DOR, an 
 inferior player might beat you by rote. The 
 student will, in counteraction, observe where 
 he can vary with advantage, or without in- 
 creasing the disadvantage of being confined 
 sometime to defensive steps by playing against 
 the move. Thus, while with a mixture of 
 prudence and spirit, you do not disdain to adopt 
 from edited forms steps that are suited to the 
 situation; the features of your play will be im- 
 pressed with the character of your own, powers; 
 and you will guard against a habit of moving 
 in a mechanical series, as if you wanted that 
 promptness which should conform itself to all 
 circumstances. 
 
 You
 
 INTRODUCTION TO CHESS. 
 
 You may play the game of HANNIBAL or 
 FABIUS. If you have naturally a disposition 
 for enterprise, and are fertile in expedients, the 
 exercise of invention may prevent an adversary 
 of slower parts from prosecuting those syste- 
 matic plans, which he has tried and proved. 
 If, on the contrary, your ;:bilities are rather 
 solid than splendid, you will, even in those 
 speculations into which a player of an opposite 
 turn will sometimes draw you, steer as near as 
 possible to the shore of certainty, never launch- 
 ing into a new track without deliberation. But 
 whether your ingenuity expatiate, or your judg- 
 ment preponderate, your best guide will be 
 experience. If you unite both, you will not 
 want, though you will excuse, the officiousness 
 of advice. 
 
 END OF THE INTRODUCTION. 

 
 ANALYSIS 
 
 OF 
 
 THE GAME OF CHESS, 
 
 BY MR. PHILIDOR. 
 
 TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 
 
 SEVERAL PARTIES, PLAYED BY THE 
 AUTHOR BLINDFOLD, 
 
 AGAINST 
 
 THREE ADVERSARIES. 
 
 a Jfteto tuition, 
 
 WITH CORRECTIONS BY THE EDITOR, 
 
 CHIEFLY REGARDING THE PERSPICUITY OF THE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Liidimus ejfigieni belli. VIDA.
 
 
 auttettisement. 
 
 ,<rarauj. :ut>. . 
 
 It is to be remarked, that, in the Notes, the 
 reader is addressed as the player supposed to 
 move the white pieces; and, to avoid ambi- 
 guity, the player of the blacks, an imaginary 
 antagonist of the reader, is spoken of in the 
 third person. 
 
 
 ANALYSIS
 
 
 > . f/ 
 
 I 
 
 ANALYSIS 
 
 OF 
 
 CHESS. 
 
 PHILIDOR'S OWN GAMES. 
 
 JFirst 
 
 i. 
 
 W. King's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 * * 
 
 B. The same. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 VOL. i. <i 4. W.
 
 226 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares (a); 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn (6). 
 B. The bishop to his Q. knight's 3d (c). 
 
 (a) This pawn is pushed to its extent for two reasons : 
 to hinder the adverse king's bishop from attacking your 
 king's bishop's pawn ; and to bring the strength of your 
 pawns into the centre of the board. 
 
 (6) When you hare two centre pawns in the present 
 situation, you must take care not to push either of them, 
 before your adversary proposes to exchange : which you will 
 then avoid, by pushing forwards the attacked pawn. 
 
 (c) If, instead of withdrawing, this bishop gives check, 
 you cover with the Q. bishop; and if he exchange, you 
 take his bishop with your knight, you will then defend your 
 king's pawn. Thus far PIIIODOII. The MODENESE, in a 
 letter to LOLLI, p. 365, proposes that the JBlack should 
 play as follows : 
 
 5. 
 
 B; The K. bishop gives check. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop, checking. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The knight takes the bishop. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. This causes the white K. pawn to 
 be taken off by an inevitable exchange. The MODE- 
 NKSE considers that the position will then be equal. 
 
 6. W.
 
 FIRST PAETY. 227 
 
 6. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. King's knight to his king's 2d (d). 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his queen's 3d (e). 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. knight to his king's square. 
 
 JO. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square (/). 
 
 (rf) Before the bishop's pawn has been pushed two 
 squares, avoid playing the knight to the bishop's 3d, when 
 it will answer equally to play him any where else ; for the 
 obstruction given by the knight to the motion of the pawn, 
 is sometimes inconvenient. 
 
 (e) The bishop retires, to avoid being attacked by the Q. 
 pawn, because that would force you to take his pawn with 
 yours, and separate your pawns. 
 
 (/) He plays this to give an opening to the rook ; and 
 this cannot be hindered, whether he or you take. 
 
 11.
 
 228 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 11. 
 
 II. 
 
 W. The queen to her 2d square (g). 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn (h ). 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d (z). 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. knight to K. bishop's 4th (kj. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 () You should not take the offered pawn, because your 
 K. pawn would then lose its file j whereas, leaving yours 
 to be taken, you supply its place with the Q. pawn, and 
 sustain that afterwards with the K. b. pawn. These two 
 pawns united will undoubtedly win the game. 
 
 (h) lie takes the pawn to pursue his design of giving an 
 opening to his rook. 
 
 (i) He plays this bishop to increase the security of his 
 queen's pawn, and to enable him to push afterwards his 
 queen's bishop's pawn: you could, it is true, oblige him 
 to double a pawn in the knight's file, by taking his king's 
 bishop with your queen's bishop, but this would make an 
 opening to his king's rook : besides a double pawn, when 
 connected with others, as his would be, may be manoeuvred 
 without disadvantage. In the first back game, he takes 
 your queen's bishop with that of his king. 
 
 (k) Your king's pawn being as yet in no danger, your 
 knight attacks his bishop, in order to take him, or force 
 him to remove. 
 
 14. W.
 
 FIRST PARTY. 
 
 . 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the bishop (I). 
 B. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The king castles with his rook ( m}. 
 B. Q,. knight to the queen's 2d. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The K. knight takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the knight. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. knight to Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its king's square. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square (n). 
 
 (1) It is dangerous to let the adverse king's bishop corn, 
 mand the diagonal of your king's bishop's pawn; and there- 
 fore, when your queen's pawn cannot form a bar to his 
 action, it is necessary to oppose him with your queen's 
 bishop, and to exchange him for that piece at a suitable 
 opportunity. 
 
 (m) You castle on that side, in order to sustain your 
 king's bishop's pawn, which you will advance two squares 
 as soon as your king's pawn is attacked. 
 
 (n) He is forced to push this, to hinder your king's 
 bishop's pawn from attacking his queen, which would give 
 you two pawns in a front line upon his field. 
 
 3 19. W.
 
 230 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS* 
 
 19. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square (o). 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square (p). 
 
 21. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The 1st of the double pawns 1 square. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. K. kn, pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. knight to his queen's 4th. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The kniglit to the K. knight's 3d (q). 
 B. K. knight to adverse king's 3d (r). 
 
 (o) To enable you to push the king's knight's pawn to 
 its extent, 
 
 (p) To prevent your knight from entering his game, and 
 forcing his queen to remove, which would immediately 
 make an opening for your pawns. 
 
 (9) To enable yourself to push your king's bishop's pawn 
 next, which will be then supported by three pieces, the 
 rook, the bishop, and the knight. 
 
 (r) He thus prepares to cut off the communication be- 
 tween your pieces, and break the strength of your pawns; 
 which he would do, by pushing his king's knight's pawn ; 
 but you prevent his object, by sacrificing your rook. 
 
 24. W.
 
 URST PARTY. 231 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The Q. rook takes the knight, 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. The Q. rook takes the rook's pawn. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The rook to its king's square (s ) 
 B. The queen takes the Q. knight's pawn.' 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her king's 3d (/), 
 
 28. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square, 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen to her 4th square (u). 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The queen takes the queen. 
 B. The pawn takes the queen. 
 
 (s) To support ypur king's pawn, which would be left 
 without adequate support, were you to push your king's 
 bishop's pawn. 
 
 (/) The queen returns, to prevent cheek-mate. 
 
 (ii) Offering to exchange, to destroy the possibility of 
 jpheck-mate by your bishop and queen. 
 
 4 31. W.
 
 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 31. 
 
 
 * 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn in his way. 
 
 B. The kn ght to his 3d square. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. K. b pawn 1 square (to). 
 B. Q. rook to adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse K. bishop's 4th (*/). 
 B. The knight to adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The knight to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The K. rook gives check. 
 
 (z) It is material to observe, that when your bishop 
 runs upon white squares, you must put your pawns upon 
 black ; or, if the bishop runs upon black squares, then 
 keep the pawns upon white ; by which method the bishop 
 prevents the adversary's pieces from intruding between your 
 pawns. This rule is hardly ever to be dispensed with, in 
 case you attack, and have some pawns advanced ; but, in 
 case of a defence, the rule must be reversed, and the pawns 
 set upon the bishop's colour. 
 
 (y) Here is an illustration of the above note: if your 
 bishop ran black, the adversary's king might insinuate be- 
 tween your two pawns. 
 
 36. W.
 
 FIRST PARTY. 238 
 
 36. 
 
 W, The bishop interposes, at his knight's 4th. 
 B. The knight to adverse queen's 2d. 
 
 37. 
 
 W. The K. pawn gives check. 
 B. The king to his knight's 3d (%). $ 
 
 38. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The rook to its K. bishop's square. 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The-knight checks, at his K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 40. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. Plays any where: the white pushes to queen. 
 
 {2) As the king may retire to his bishop's 
 will make it the subject of a second back game. 
 
 FIRST
 
 234 
 
 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Tieeljth Move of the ElacL 
 POSITION OF THE PIECES. 
 
 B. The king's bishop takes the queen's bishop, 
 
 13. 
 
 \V. The queen takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 14. W.
 
 FIRST PARTY. 35 
 
 14. 
 
 W. K. knight to K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The knight takes the bishop. 
 ,B. The queen takes the knight. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The king castles with his rook. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. knight to his 2d square. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 2d. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The queen to her 2d square. 
 B. Q. knight to his third square. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The knight to his K. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 4th. 
 
 23. W.
 
 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its king's square. 
 B. Q. knight to adverse king's 3d. 
 
 2>. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen takes the Q. r. pawn. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The queen takes the Q. kn. pawn. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. K.b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The knight to his king's square. 
 
 28. 
 
 "W. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The queen to adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The queen takes the queen. 
 B. The pawn takes the queen. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The knight to his queen's 3d. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. The knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 32. W.
 
 FIRST PARTY. 237 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The knight to adverse queen's 3d. * 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square, or any move indiffer- 
 ently, the game being inevitably lost. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. rook to its Q. knight's square. 
 
 35. 
 
 \V. The bishop gives check. 
 B. The king retires, having but one place 
 
 36. 
 
 W. The knight gives check. 
 B. The king removes. 
 
 -37. : 
 
 W. The knight to adverse queen's square, dis- 
 covering check. 
 
 B. The king removes where he can% 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The K. pawn becomes a queen, and gives 
 check-mate. 
 
 . 
 ii 
 
 SECOND
 
 238 
 
 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS* 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Thirty -seventh Move of the Black, p. 233. 
 POSITION OF THE PIECES. 
 
 37. 
 B. The king to his bishop's square. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The rook to Q. rook's square. 
 B. The rook gives check, at the adverse Q. 
 knight's square. 
 
 39. W.
 
 FIRST PARTY. 239 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The knight takes the rook. 
 
 40. 
 
 W. The king to his rook's 2d. 
 B. The knight to adverse Q. bishop's 3d. 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 
 42. 
 
 W. The knight takes the pawn. 
 W. The rook to its K. knight's 4th. 
 
 43. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square, giving check. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 44. 
 W. The bishop gives check, at adverse king'* 
 
 3d. 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 45. 
 
 W. The K. pawn becomes a queen, checking ; 
 and wini.
 
 PHILIDORS ANALYSIS. 
 
 This Game is so exquisitely played, that it is not easy to 
 decide where the vanquished errs. Under the Second 
 Move, a subtle impropriety may lurk; but this z> 
 disputable. EDITOR. 
 
 W. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. King's bishop to Q,. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares (a). 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn (b). 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 (a) It is necessary to advance this pawn two squares to 
 prevent the adversary from bringing his pawns into the 
 centre of the board ; and this he could effect, by pushing 
 his queen's pawn on your bishop, which would give him the 
 move and attack. 
 
 (b) He pushes his queen's pawn two squares, in the first 
 back game. 
 
 5. W.
 
 SECOND PARTY. 241 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d (c). 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K> bishop to his queen's 3d*. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The queen to her K. bishop's 2d. 
 B. Q. knight to his Q. bishop's 3d (d). 
 
 (c) He thus prepares to push his queen's pawn, in order 
 to make room for his king's bishop ; and he opposes his 
 other bishop to your king's, to remove him from the 
 diagonal, according to the rule prescribed in the first game. 
 
 * In PHILIDOR'S Third Regular Party, vol. ii. p. 81. 
 the white bishop exchanges ; but this appears to be better. 
 
 (d) If, instead of getting out his pieces, by playing his 
 knight, he should continue to advance his pawns, you might 
 easily win. It must be observed, that one or two pawns, 
 too far advanced, may be reckoned as lost, except when 
 there is an open field for other pieces to protect them, or 
 when the same pawns may be sustained or supplied by 
 others. By the second back game it will convincingly ap- 
 pear, that two united pawns upon the fourth rank, ar 
 better than two isolated upon the sixth. 
 
 VOL. i. * 9. W.
 
 242 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn I square. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. r. pawn 2 squares (e). 
 
 11. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square (f). 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 4th. 
 
 (e) He pushes this pawn two squares to prevent your 
 pawns from assailing his. Observe, two equal bodies of 
 pawns are on the board : you have four to three on the 
 king's side, and he has a similar superiority on the queen's 
 side ; the player that is able first to separate his adversary's 
 pawns, and especially if he break the larger division, will win 
 the game. 
 
 (f) This move is material, by its seasonable anticipation, 
 because, by pushing his king's rook's pawn a square, he 
 would have cut off the communication between jour pawns ; 
 your king's knight's pawn, unmoved, had been unable to 
 join that of your bishop, without being exposed to be takep 
 by his rook's pawn. 
 
 14. W,
 
 SECOND PARTY. 243 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's square, 
 JB. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The knight checks the king, and attacks the 
 rook. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The king to his knight's second. 
 B. The knight takes the rook. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The king takes the knight ( g. ) 
 B. The queen to her 2d square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen to her K. knight's square (7i). 
 B. Q, r. pawn two squares. 
 
 19. W. 
 
 (g} Though a rook is commonly more valued than a 
 knight, yet two causes conspire to make the exchange ra- 
 ther beneficial to you : his knight has consumed four 
 moves, your rook not one, and your king but two, so that 
 for the difference between the knight and rook, you have 
 two clear moves ; the menacing situation of the knight had 
 been troublesome, and the security in which his removal 
 leaves your king will more fully enable you to form an 
 attack on which ever side the adversary may chuse to 
 castle. 
 
 (/*) It is essential thus to sustain the K. kn. pawn, lest 
 R 2 he
 
 244 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's third (t). 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 B. The king castles on his queen's side 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The K. bishop gives check. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 W. Q. knight to Q. bishop's 2d (/). 
 B. Q. rook to its square. 
 23. 
 
 W. K. bishop to adverse Q. knight's 4th, 
 B. The queen to her square (m). 
 
 he should sacrifice his bishop for your two pawns; and as 
 all the strength of your game consists in pawns, the breaking 
 of them would give him the attack, and probably the game. 
 
 () In order to induce the adversary to push his queers 
 bishop's pawn, which would give you the victory very soou, 
 by making an opening for your knights. 
 
 (&) His king castles on that side, to avoid your strongest 
 division of pawns, which present a menacing front, and are 
 farther advanced than those on the left wing. 
 
 (/) Had you given check with this knight, you would have 
 entangled your bishop, and lost many moves : it is therefore 
 better to place the knight to cooperate with the pawns. 
 
 (m) In order to place her next at the king's bishop's square, 
 to increase the support of the queen's bishop's pawn. 
 
 24. W.
 
 SECOND PARTY. 245 
 
 s 
 
 24. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The queen to her K. bishop's square. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The Q. kn. pawn takes the Q. b. pawn. 
 B. The Q. kn. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. K. knight to his queen's 2d (n). 
 B. Pawn in Q. b. file 1 s quare (0). 
 
 27. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. b. pawn I square (p}. , 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop gives check. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the knight, checking, 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The K. knight gives check. 
 B. The king to his queen's 2d (g). 
 
 31. W. 
 
 (n) With a view to pursue your attack on his pawn. 
 
 (o) To gain a move, and to hinder your K. knight from 
 placing himself at your Q- knight's third. He plays, in- 
 stead, the K. b. pawn in the third back-game. 
 
 (p) His situation is, by any play, irretrievable; because 
 your knights have a free passage into his game. 
 
 (j) If his king take your queen's bishop, you win his 
 R 3 queen
 
 246 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. bishop to his K. knight's square. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The pawn gives check. 
 B. The king to his square. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. K. knight to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 B. K. bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The queen to her 4th square (r). 
 B. Lost every where. 
 
 queen by a discovered check ; and if his king remore else, 
 where, he will lose his queen's bishop. 
 
 (r) The queen next takes the queen's pawn, or as the 
 adversary may play, distresses his pieces, and wins th 
 game. 
 
 FIRST
 
 SECOND PARTY. 247 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Third Move of the Black, p. 240; 
 
 3. 
 
 B. The queen's pawn 2 squares. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The K. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The Q. b. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The K. bishop gives check. 
 B. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the bishop. 
 B. The Q. knight takes the bishop. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The Q,. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The Q. knight takes the pawn. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 B. The same. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 *4 10. H
 
 248 PUILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The bishop to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The king castles. 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The K. knight takes the queen. 
 B, Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same; 
 
 15. 
 
 W. K. rook to its 3d square. 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The rook takes the bishop. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K. rook to its queen's 3d. 
 B. Q. rook to its king's square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The K. knight takes the pawn. 
 B. The knight to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 19. W.
 
 SECOND PARTY. 249 
 
 19. 
 
 W. K. rook to its king's 3d. 
 
 B. The knight takes the rook's pawn, checking. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The king to his Q. knight's square. 
 B. The knight retires. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The knight at once checks the king, and 
 attacks the rook, &c. &c. 
 
 SECOND
 
 PHlLlDOll's ANALVS/S. 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Eighth More of the Black, p. 241 
 
 8. 
 B. Q. bishop's pawn \ square. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his king's 2d. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. pawn to adverse queen's 3d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his 3d square. 
 B. Q. bishop to his queen's 4th. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn I square. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The Q. b. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The Q. r. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 15. W,
 
 SECOND PARTY. 251 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The K. knight takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 B. The rook to its Q,. knight's square. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. knight to his 3d square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 B. K. bishop to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 19. 
 W. The king castles, and will win. 
 
 THIRD
 
 352 
 
 rHILIDOR S ANALYSIS. 
 
 THIRD BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Tzccnty-sixth Move of the Black, p. 245. 
 POSITION OF THE PIECES. 
 
 
 26. 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. K. knight to Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 28. W.
 
 SECOND PARTY. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop gives check. 
 B. The king to Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 29. 
 W. The K. knight gives check, at adverse Q. 
 
 bishop's 4th. 
 B. The K. bishop takes the knight. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's square. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The rook to Q. knight's square. 
 B. The king to Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 9$. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop gives check, at adverse 
 
 queen's third. 
 B. The king to his queen's square. 
 
 33. 
 W. The queen gives check, at adverse Q. 
 
 knight's 3d. 
 B. The king any where, loses the game.
 
 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 Cfnrti 
 
 THE BLACK PLAYER MOVING FIRST. 
 
 N. B. The tactics of this game are not quite regular; 
 but the first moves of the White are very well calculated, 
 especially when some odds are granted. PHILIDOR. But 
 see the Observations on the White's second move by the 
 Editor. 
 
 1. 
 
 B. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 W . The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 R K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. Q. pawn I square*. 
 
 * According to the Corrected Variation on the Jirst 
 back game, this defence is not tenable, although Rci LOPEZ, 
 a Spanish author on Chess, preferred it to the defence by the 
 queen's knight, as well as PHILIDOR. The latter counter- 
 move, of which an example is given in the Seventh Essay 
 of the Introduction, has been demonstrated to be safe. If 
 the Reader should concur in thinking the present game to 
 have a radical defect as an entire model ; still it deserves 
 to be studied, as a depositary of masterly instructions for the 
 conduct of the pawns, which will admit of general applica- 
 tion. AUTHOR OF THE INTRODUCTION. 
 
 3. B.
 
 THIRD PARTY. 255 
 
 3. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th *. 
 W. K. b. pawn 3 squares (a. ) 
 
 4. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn (&) 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. Q,. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 * The first player should adopt the third move in the 
 first back game. 
 
 (a) It is advantageous to change your king's bishop's 
 pawn for the adversary's king's pawn, because, by that 
 means, your king's and queen's pawns may place them- 
 selves in the centre of the board ; besides, in castling oa 
 the right, your rook obtains immediate liberty to act, as 
 appears in the first back game. 
 
 (b) Should the adversary refuse to take the bishop'* 
 pawn, you leave it exposed, and cautiously avoid to push it, 
 unless he should castle in the opposite quarter ; in which 
 case, you instantly play it, as in the second back game, 
 You are, in general, to decline shewing hastily, whether 
 you design to push the pawns on your right or left, before 
 your adversary has castled, because he will otherwise retire 
 on the side where your pawns are less advanced, and less 
 able to make an impression. 
 
 7. B.
 
 256 PHILTDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d (c). 
 W. Q,. pawn I square. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. The bishop retires. 
 W. K. bishop to his queen's 3d (d). 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 W. The same. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The king castles with his rook fe"). 
 "W. Q,. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 (c) Should he take your knight, you must take his bishop 
 with your pawn, to concentre your pawns. 
 
 (d) This is the best square your king's bishop can select, 
 except the fourth of your queen's bishop : at the queen's 
 third, he is prepared to attack the king's rook's pawn, in 
 case the adversary castles on that side: 
 
 (e) He castles on the queen's side, in the third back 
 game ; then you immediately castle on the king's, in order 
 to assail him with all the pawns on your left. As a retreat 
 from an ineffective attack can seldom be made without loss, 
 you should forbear engaging the adverse party closely, until 
 your pawns are sustained by one another, and the support, 
 ing pawns by your pieces. The proper form of attack is 
 pursued by the whites in the third back game ; and the pro. 
 gression of the black pawns, there, is an example of a pre- 
 mature assault. 
 
 11. B
 
 THIRD PARTY. 257 
 
 11. 
 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 4th 
 W. The queen to her king's 3d 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the bishop (g). 
 W. The queen takes the knight. 
 
 13. 
 
 B. The Q,. bishop takes the knight (h). 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 \V. The queen to her K. knight's 3d. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 "VV. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 (/) To make room for his king's bishop's pawn, design, 
 ing, by its advance, to break your cordon of pawns. 
 
 (g) If he had pushed his king's bishop's pawn two 
 squares, you should have taken these steps in the following 
 order : have attacked his queen with your queen's bishop ; 
 next, have pushed your king's rook's pawn upon his bishop, 
 to force him to take your knight ; then, have taken his 
 bishop with your pawn, in order to increase the support of 
 your king's pawn, and replace it if lost. 
 
 (A) If he refuse, the bishop must remain imprisoned 
 by your pawns ; or his player must lose three moves, which 
 would ruin his situation. 
 
 VOL. i. s 16. B
 
 25S PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. K. rook to hb K. bishop's 3d (i). 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares (k). 
 
 17. 
 
 B. Q. rook to his K. bishop's square. 
 W. The king castles with his Q. rook. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. Q. h. pawn 2 squares. 
 \V. K. pawn 1 square (/). 
 
 19. B. 
 
 _ 
 
 (z) Designing either to remove your queen, or to double, 
 if necessary, with the other rook. 
 
 (k) To give a protected space to your queen, should the 
 adversary attack her with his king's rook. 
 
 (/) The refined motives which dictate this move make 
 k difficult to be explained. Preparatory to analysing it, 
 let it be observed, that when you have a diagonal chain of 
 pawns, that, which ought to be the leader from position, 
 must pot be left in the rear. One project of the adversary, 
 vas to force ypu to commit your pawns. See jag your king's 
 pawn out of (he oblique line formed by your other pawns ; 
 he proposed, by pushing his queen's bishop's pawn, to in. 
 duce your queen's pawn to advance a square, first, that its 
 progress might be blocked by his pa^n., while your kl: 
 pawn was left behind j and sccoadly, for this, effect, that 
 your own pawn might shield his king's rook's pawn from 
 the action of your bisliop. Both these designs you defeat 
 by impelling the king's pawn against bis rook, and it is 
 to sacrifice it. Should he take it. an open file is 
 
 obtained
 
 THIRD PARTY. 
 19. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 20. 
 
 B. The bishop to bis Q. bishop's^d. 
 W. The knight to his king's 4t& (t.) r . 
 
 igyte 
 
 B. K. rook to the adverse K- bishop's 3d. 
 W. The queen to her K. knight's 2d. 
 
 W 
 
 B. The queen to he? K. bishop's 2d (#.). 
 W. The knight to adverse Iv knight's 4th. 
 
 obtained for your queen's pawn, which you will advance 
 immediately, and sustain in case of need, Avith others, in 
 order to promote it, or engage it in some combination that 
 may conduce to victory. It is true that his queen's pawn, 
 passing, at the capture, into the king's file, appears to have 
 the same advantage of having no opposition from your pawns 
 to make a queen ; however there is a difference, because his 
 pawn, being isolated, Avill be in danger, all along its passage, 
 of seizure by your pieces. 
 
 (m) It was expedient to play this knight, to, stop his 
 king's pawn ; in its present state, it blocks the passage of its 
 own bishop and knight. 
 
 () In order afterwards to give check ; if, instead, he 
 had pushed his king's rook's pawn, to hinder the attack of 
 your knight, you must have advanced the queen's pawn, 
 which would have been a decisive stroke. 
 
 s 2 23. B.
 
 260 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 23. 
 
 15. The queen gives check. 
 W. The king to the Q. knight's square. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. The rook takes the bishop (0). 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 25. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. bishop's 4th. 
 W. The queen to her king's 4th (p). 
 
 26. 
 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 W. The knight takes the queen. 
 
 27. 
 
 B. The rook to adverse K. bishop's 4th. 
 AV. The knight to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 28. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. rook to its K. knight's 3d. 
 
 (0) He takes the bishop to save his king's rook's pawn 
 besides, the hfchop incommodes him more than any other 
 piece. His queen will restrict your queen's rook, after 
 apt u ring his. 
 
 (p) Having the advantage of a rook against a bishop, 
 towards the end of a party, you will gain by changing the 
 queen. His queen would be troublesome to you ; but as 
 vou have played, he is forced to exchange, to avoid check- 
 mate. 
 
 29. B,
 
 THIRD PARTY. 261 
 
 29. 
 
 B. The knight to his Q,. bishop's 4th. 
 W. The knight to adverse king's 3d. 
 
 30. 
 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 31. 
 
 B. The rook to his K. bishop's 3d. 
 W. K, rook to its queen's square (q). 
 
 32. 
 
 B. The rook takes the pawn. 
 W. K. rook to adverse queen's 2d wins the 
 game. 
 
 (q) You must seize the open files, to bring the rooks 
 into play, especially at the latter part of the game. 
 
 .-. urf) :;. 
 
 FIRST
 
 262 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 Fl&ST BACK GAME. 
 
 On the Third Move oj the Black, p. 255. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. Queen's pawn 2 squares. 
 W. K. b. pawn^ squares. 
 
 4 
 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. The K. b. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse knight's 4th. 
 W. ^. pawn 1 square. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. K. b, pawfi 2 squares *. 
 W. K. bishop to the Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 * In the Corrected Variation annexed, the first player's 
 sixth move, is Q. pazsn to adverse king's 3d. Among the 
 Supplements in the second volume, p. 133, PUILIDOR has a 
 Variation on this back game in which the same move is 
 taken : but the Supplement differs from the Corrected Va- 
 riation, at the seventh move. 
 
 8. B,
 
 THIRD PARTY, 263 
 
 8. 
 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. K. knight to his king's 2d, y ^ 
 
 9. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. K. r. pawn I square. t 
 
 10. 
 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 3d.. r O j ^ 
 W. The king castles. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. Q. knight to his rook's 4th. 
 W. The K. bishop gives check. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. The Q,. bishop interposes. 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop, 
 
 13, 
 
 B. The queen takes the bishop. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. kn. pawn % squafes. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The Q. b- pawn takes the pawn passing by*. 
 W. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 16. B. 
 
 * Takes thepazcnpassingby. According to an institute 
 which prevails chiefly in England and France, " When a 
 
 s 4 pawn
 
 PH1LI1>OR'S ANALYSIS, 
 
 16. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 17. 
 
 B. The bishop to his king's 2d. 
 W. K. knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. K. knight to his square. 
 W. K. knight to adverse knight's 3d* 
 
 19. 
 
 B. K. rook to its 2d square. 
 W. Pawn in K. file 1 square. 
 
 20. 
 
 B. The queen to her knight's 2d. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 21. 
 
 B. K. bishop to his 3d square. 
 W. The K. rook takes the pawn. 
 
 pawn has penetrated to the fifth square, of his own file, which 
 is the fourth on the adversary's side, adverse pawns, on 
 adjoining files, not having moTed, forfeit the privilege of 
 going two squares ; and if one of them should move two 
 squares, the advanced pawn may take him, placing himself 
 as if the captured pawn had moved one square." The rule 
 is vindicated in the Appendix^ at the end of Vol. II. 
 
 22. B.
 
 THIRD PARTY. 
 22. 
 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 W. The K. rook takes the Q. knight. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 W. The Q. rook takes the pawn. 
 
 94 
 
 .CT:. 
 
 B. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The rook gives check. 
 
 25. 
 
 B. The king retires. 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 26. 
 
 B. The queen to her knight's 4th. 
 W. Q. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 
 27. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. bishop's 4th. 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 4th. 
 
 28. 
 B. The queen takes the K. knight, not knowing 
 
 an effective resource for her king. 
 W. The bishop gives check. 
 
 B. The king retires. 
 
 \Y. The knight gives check-mate. 
 
 CORRECTED
 
 266 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 
 CORRECTED VARIATION, 
 
 On tht Sixth Move of the Slack, in the First Back Game 
 of the Third Party. 
 
 Extracted from a Letter of the Anonymous Modenese, 
 inserted in Lolli's Work, p. 366. 
 
 ' . 
 1. 
 
 B. K. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. K. knight to the bishop's 3d (the move cen- 
 sured by Philidur}. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. The best move is Q. pawn 2 squares; which 
 our Author has introduced into his first 
 back game. 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the K. pawn. 
 W.The K. b. pawn takes the K. pawn. 
 
 5 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse knight's 4th. 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square* 
 
 Here
 
 THIRD PARTY. 2(T7 
 
 Hsfc tlie Anonymous Moflenese interposes the following 
 commentary : u Our Author judges the play of tho White 
 " <to be best : and I prefer that of the Black ; but now 
 u the Black, instead of pushing the K. b. pawn 2 squares, 
 u should pursue the following course : 
 
 6. 
 
 B. Q. pawn to adverse king's 3d. 
 W. K. knight to the rook's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the K. r. pawn. 
 W. If the K. rook take tlie knight, the position 
 will be rwned by a check from the black 
 queen. Therefore, the Q. bishop takes 
 the pawn. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the K. bishop. 
 W. The K. rook takes the knight. Or, as be- 
 low. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The Q,. bishop takes the knight. 
 W. The K. kn. pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 W. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The queen takes the undefended pawn. The 
 Modenese observes, that the Black will 
 
 have
 
 68 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 have gained a pawn, with a better game. 
 The Editor of Philidor dissents from 
 this, considering the first player not to 
 have gained the pawn without some 
 expense in position, though it may be too 
 light to vindicate the defence. 
 
 '-* ':- ' ,.?. Or, 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The king takes the knight. The second 
 player thus saves the pawn, but forfeits 
 the manoeuvre of castling, and has a 
 pawn isolated. 
 
 ,'t 
 
 .-.. ' . 
 Hit/ jj-i rr;i*'Jo >?5.- 
 
 SECOND
 
 THIRD PARTY. 269 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Fifth More of the Slack, p. 255. 
 
 . .'i 3iiT ."// 
 
 5. 
 
 B. The king castles. 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The queen to her K. bishop's 3d. 
 
 7 
 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the pawn, 
 W. The Q. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. Q. r. pawn % squares. 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 9, 
 
 B. The queen to her 3d square. 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. K. knight to his king's square, 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 II. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The queen to adverse K. rook's 4th, 
 
 ia
 
 S70 PHlLIDOlTs ANALYSIS. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 squ,are. 
 
 1^ 
 
 B. K. r.. pawn 1 square. 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the K. b. pawn. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. The king to his rook's square. 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the K. r. pawn. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. The queen to her K. rook's 4tli commands 
 the event of the game. 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 THIRD
 
 THIRD P4RT1T. 271 
 
 - I nv/jij .<! .o 
 THIRD BACK GAME, 
 
 TVnffc 3/ore of the mack, p. 256. 
 
 2 1 fwcq .J .p .Y, r> 
 
 B. The king castles with the Q. rook. 
 W. The king castles. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. p ^ 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's Jifo Hy/aj 
 
 12. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 . 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 13. 
 
 B. Q. rook to his K. knight's square, 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 squai'e. 
 n 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. The Q. bishop takes the knight. 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 I it / 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 17. B.
 
 272 
 
 PIIILIDOR 8 ANALYSIS. 
 
 17. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. The bishop to his Q. bishop's 2<1. 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. K. rook to its Q. knight's square. 
 
 20. 
 
 B. K. rook to its 4th square. 
 W. Q. b. pawn to adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 22. 
 
 B. K. knight to his king's squanf . 
 "W. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 23. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 \V. The K. rook takes the pawn. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. K. rook to his Q. knight's 4th. 
 
 25. 
 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The K. bishop takes the Q. r. pawn. 
 
 26. B.
 
 THIRD PARTY. 273 
 
 f 
 
 26. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn* and gives check. 
 
 27. 
 
 B. The king retires. 
 W. The queen gives check. 
 
 28. 
 
 B. The Q. knight interposes. 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 29. 
 
 B. The king to his queen's 2d. 
 IV. The queen takes the Q. pawn, checking. 
 
 30, 
 
 B. The king retires. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. May obviously wia 
 by various courses. 
 
 ; . 
 
 
 jFourtb
 
 274 PHILIDOlt's ANALYSIS. 
 
 JTouttb Pattp. 
 
 THE BLACK MOVING FIRST. 
 1. 
 
 B. King's pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square (a),, 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. Thfi pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 
 (a) 111 play of the adversary at this stage, because by 
 pushing your queen's pawn two squares, you regain the 
 advantage of the move. PHILIDOR. In an earlier edition, 
 the step thus censured is said to transfer the attack, and 
 probably the game, to the second player. It is rescued from 
 the implication of entailing defeat, by the perpetual check 
 to which the writer reduces the first back-game : but such 
 a subterfuge admits the adverse position to be superior, and 
 the attack to be virtually forfeited. The Anonymous 
 Modenese, in a Practical Commentary which is subjoined, 
 asserts the absolute propriety of the step in question. Air. 
 
 THOR Or THE INTRODUCTION. 
 
 4. R
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 275 
 
 4. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares (c). 
 W. K. pawn 1 square (d). 
 
 6. 
 
 B. Q,. pawn 1 square (e). 
 W. The queen to her K. bishop's 2d. 
 
 (b) If, instead, he had played the king's knight to the 
 king's second, you should have advanced your king's pawn ; 
 sustaining it afterwards with the king's bishop's pawn. 
 
 (c) If he had played his Q. bishop to the king's third, you 
 must have played your K. bishop to the queen's third, and 
 then the situation would have been the same as it is at the 
 sixth move of the Second Party. If he had attacked your 
 queen with his Q. b. pawn^ he would have played very ill, 
 because his Q. pawn would have been left behind. Vide 
 the First Back Game, and third Party, note (1), p. 258. 
 
 (d) It is policy to decline changing your king's pawn 
 for the adverse king's bishop's, or your queen's pawn for 
 the queen's bishop's ; on account of the greater utility of 
 the royal pawns ; occupying the centre, they preclude the 
 adversary from the most advantageous posts. 
 
 (e) If he had taken your king's pawn, you should have 
 taken his queen ; his pawn would have remained in your 
 power; and by preventing him from castling, you had kept 
 the attack in your hands. He plays the queen to her bishop's 
 second, in the second Back Game. 
 
 T% 7. B.
 
 276 PIIILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. Q knight to his queen's 2d. 
 W. K. knight to his queen'f 4th. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. Q. b.pawn 1 square, 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The K. bishop takes the knight. 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop (/). 
 
 12. 
 
 B. K. knight to his king's 2d. 
 W. K. bishop to his queen's 3cL 
 
 13. 
 
 B. The kirig castles with his rook* 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 . 
 
 (/) When you have two bodies of pawns, and an op. 
 portunity of transferring a pawn from one body to another, 
 the pawn should pass to the larger division, to concentre 
 them. 
 
 14. B.
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 277 
 
 14. 
 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 2d (g). 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The same (h\. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 17. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The king castles with his Q, rook (/). 
 
 18. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 (g) Having no object for the power of his queen as she 
 stood, he removes her to make room for his pawns, designing 
 to push them upon you. 
 
 (h) The advance of this pawn obstructs the game, by 
 lessening the facility of exchanging ; but liberty to make an 
 opening with your king's rook's pawn, is reserved, and it 
 will be expedient to use it, as soon as your pieces are ready 
 to form and sustain the attack. 
 
 (0 You castle on the queen's side to have more freedom 
 in attacking on your right. To have taken the pawn, 
 would have united in the centre the adversary's pawns, and 
 impeded the operation of your pieces. 
 
 x3 19. B.
 
 
 278 FHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. Q. knight to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square (<t). 
 
 20. 
 
 B. The knight takes the bishop. 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 
 21. 
 
 B. The bishop to his K. bishop's 2d (I}, 
 W. K. r. pawn to adverse rook's 4th. 
 
 22. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square (m). 
 W. Q. rook to its K. rook's 3d. 
 
 23. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn to adverse knight's 4th, 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. The bishop to his king's square (7*). 
 W. The K. r. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 ( A-) Had you taken the knight with your queen's bishop, 
 you had fallen into the error of uniting in the centre the 
 adversary's pawns. 
 
 (I) He plays this bishop to fill the place of his king's 
 knight's pawn, in case it be taken. 
 
 (m) To attack the knight that covers your king, having 
 no move obviously better ; for by taking your pawn he would 
 be equally liable to lose. 
 
 (n) If he takes the pawn with his bishop, he equally loses. 
 
 25. B.
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 
 25. 
 
 13. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 
 W. The Q. rook takes the rook's pawn. 
 
 26. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 W. The K. rook takes the bishop. 
 
 27. 
 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 W. The queen gives check, at her K. rook's 
 4th. 
 
 28. 
 
 The king to his knight's square. 
 W, The queen gives check-mate (o). 
 
 (0) It would appear, that if you succeed in making an 
 opening o-i the adverse king, with two or three pawns, the 
 game is in effect won. 
 
 T 4 PRACTICAL
 
 280 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 PRACTICAL COMMENTARY 
 
 On the Second and Third Moves of the Party. 
 
 The ANONYMOUS MODENESE [Lolli's Work, 
 p. 366.] contends, that, at the third move, the 
 Black ought not to take with the K, pawn : but 
 should play: 
 
 3. 
 
 B. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. Tlien the 
 following course appears to ~be considered by 
 him as the best of the alternatives that can 
 be proposed for the second player. 
 W. Q,. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. The K. pawn takes the Q. pawn. 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 W. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 4th. 
 W. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The K. bishop takes the queen. The Modenese 
 breaks off 'without specifying the next move 
 of the White. An acknowledged pupil would 
 
 probably
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 281 
 
 probably play the " queen's Jcnight to the 
 king's bishop's 3rf," and undesignedly ruin 
 the parity of situation. 
 W. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 
 The MODENESE, in conclusion, observes : 
 " The Black is secure of making a timely 
 " opening by the queen's pawn two squares, 
 " without any detriment to his position. I 
 " therefore deduce, that our Author had not 
 " sufficient grounds for anticipating an unfa- 
 " vourable result from the second move in 
 <( question, which Rui LOPEZ admits into his 
 " treatise, and which PIETRO CARRERA, who 
 tc rigidly criticised it, has not censured." 
 
 On the other hand, the transcriber of the 
 preceding remarks is not satisfied that PHILI- 
 DOR would have made or tolerated the third 
 counterstep above assumed for the White, which 
 is a lost move. Instead of playing the bishop, 
 perhaps he would have answered the move of 
 the knight thus. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. The Q. pawn takes the K. pawn. Tliis is 
 mentioned by the JVIodenese, but passed over 
 
 * 
 
 as not likely to be pursued. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 W. The Q. b. pawn interposes. 
 
 5. B.
 
 283 PHIfcIDOR'3 ANALYSIS. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. The queen takes the doubled pawn. You arc 
 compelled to submit to the temporary loss of 
 a pawn. 
 W. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The K. knight takes the pawn. See the ob- 
 servation at the \th move. 
 W. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The queen to her king's 3d. 
 W. The king castles. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 W. K. rook to the king's square, He cannot 
 prevent you from recovering the pawn. Jf 
 he play the K. bishop to 2. bishop's 4th, 
 you take his knight with your bishop, and, 
 on his taking with the pawn, attack his 
 queen with your knight. TJierefore, 
 
 9. 
 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. K. knight to adverse knight's 4th. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. The queen to her king's 4th. 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The K. bishop gives check. 
 W. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 
 12. B.
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 283 
 
 12. 
 
 B. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 W. K. kn. 1 square. 
 
 13. 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The K. b. pawn takes the knight. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. The K. r. pawn takes the knight. 
 W. The pawn in K. file takes the bishop's pawn. 
 
 15. 
 
 B The distressed state of his position proves, that, 
 at flie sixth move, lie ought not to have 
 taken the pawn which you were unable pro- 
 per/?/ to defend : But even then his game 
 would have been more incommodious than in 
 PHILIDOR'S original party. 
 
 The champions of the move censured, appear 
 to have a sincere opinion of its excellence; as 
 most of them have avoided to offer any example 
 of the proper mode of opposing it. The fol- 
 lowing scanty specimen is extracted from LOLLT, 
 p. 158, 
 
 1. 
 
 B. The queen's bishop's pawn 1 square. He 
 makes the jirst and second moves in a dif- 
 ferent order, but the position is the same. 
 W. K. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 2. B.
 
 284 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 2. 
 
 B. K. pawn to its extent. 
 
 W. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 3. 
 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 2d. 
 W. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 4 
 
 ^*- A 
 
 B. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 LOLLI professes to conduct the play equally 
 no farther than to add that the fourth move 
 of the second player should be either, 
 
 Q. knight to the bishop's 3d. Or, 
 Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 What can prevent the first player from esta- 
 blishing two pawns in the centre ? PHILIDOR'S 
 defence is superior ; and his assertion, that 
 " the second player, by pushing the queen's 
 ft pawn two squares, may gain the attack," ap- 
 pears to be correct. 
 
 '^rtv 
 ic : 
 
 FIRST
 
 FOURTH PARTV. 283 
 
 iIT & . 
 
 ' 
 FIRST BACK GAME, lb 
 
 On the Fifth Move of the Black. 
 
 . ~ >eft\l rj, I. ^ifi A .*.; 
 
 .bf, 'A\\ injl .# .Y/ 
 
 5. 
 
 B. Queen's b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The K. bishop gives check. 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The Q. bishop interposes. 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop, checking. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The queen takes the bishop. 
 W. The queen to her 3d square. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. Q. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. Q. knight to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. K. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. K. bishop to his 3d square. 
 W. Q. knight to adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 12. B.
 
 286 PHILIDOIl'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. The Q. knight takes the knight. 
 W. The K. pawn takes the knight, discovering 
 check. 
 
 13. 
 
 B. The knight interposes. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 14. 
 B. The king castles with his rook. 
 
 r 
 
 W. The queen to her #d square. 
 
 15. 
 
 B. K. rook to its king's square. 
 VV. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. The knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 W. K. r. pawn % squares. 
 
 17. 
 
 B. The knight to adverse queen's 4th. 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 W. The king takes the knight. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the Q. kn. pawn. 
 W. The Q. rook attacks the bishop. 
 
 20. 
 
 B. The bishop retires to his 3d square. 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 21. B.
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 287 
 
 21. 
 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The same. 
 
 22. 
 
 B. The bishop to his K. knight's 2d. 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square: 
 
 23. 
 
 B. K. rook to its king's 2d. 
 W. K. rook to its 4th square. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. Q. rook to its king's square. 
 W. The bishop to his queen's 2d. 
 
 25. 
 
 B. K. rook to adverse king's 4th. 
 W. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 26. 
 
 B. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 W. Q. rook to K. rook's square. 
 
 27. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 W. The bishop to his 3d. 
 
 28. 
 
 B. The rook gives check*. 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 * On this more, the Editor has a Variation, which draws 
 the Gam*. 
 
 29. B.
 
 288 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 29. 
 
 B. The rook takes the queen. 
 W. The K. rook gives check. 
 
 30. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 W. The rook takes the bishop, and gives clieck- 
 inate. 
 
 
 
 
 VARIATION
 
 289 
 VARIATION BY THE EDITOR, 
 
 On the 28th Move of the Black. 
 POSITION OP THE PIECES. 
 
 When the king is impeded by his own pieces, 
 it is termed a smothered-mate. As the mate in 
 the preceding back game was partly smothered, 
 the object of the altered play is to prevent a re- 
 petition of that, by timely removes and exchanges 
 on the part of the Black, who has to move. 
 
 VOL. i. u 8. B.
 
 290 rniLiDou's ANALYSIS. 
 
 28. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 
 29. 
 
 B. The K. rook gives check. 
 "W. The queen takes the rook. 
 
 30. 
 
 B. The rook takes the queen, checking. 
 *VT. The king takes the rook. 
 
 31. 
 
 B. The king to his bishop's square. 
 VV. K. rook to adverse K. rook's square, givi 
 check. 
 
 I. The king to his 2d square. 
 \r r . Q. rook to its king's square. 
 
 g 
 
 IB. The queen to her K. bishop's 4th 
 
 $V. The king to his bishop's 3d, discovering 
 
 (check. 
 34. 
 
 B. The king to his queen's 2d. 
 W. K. rook to adverse king's square. 
 
 (6) To open for the king the only passage by which he 
 can escape. 
 
 35. B.
 
 VARIATION, &C. FOURTH PARTY. 291 
 35. 
 
 B, The queen checks at adverse K. rook's 3d. 
 Can make a drawn game by perpetual 
 check; or will win a rook, if the white 
 king, to escape from perpetual check, 
 cross the K. file. But the queen, as 
 often as the white king retires to his 
 bishop's square, must check at adverse 
 K. rook's 3d, and not in the angle. 
 
 . >F. : f, 
 
 .f 
 
 ! 
 
 P -8 
 
 . 
 
 c -nwfiq .1 i$ .W 
 
 SECOND
 
 PIIILlDOft's 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On tks Sixth Move of the Btacl: 
 
 6. 
 
 B. The quetn ta her bishop's 2d. 
 W. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 7. 
 
 B. The Q. pawn takes the pawn. 
 >V. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 8. 
 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 W. The queen to adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 9. 
 
 B- Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 10. 
 
 B. Q. knight to adverse Q. knight's 4th. 
 W. The queen to her square. 
 
 U. 
 
 B. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 12. 
 
 B. K. knight to his king's 2d. 
 W. The king castles. 
 
 13. B.
 
 FOURTH PARTY. 293 
 
 13. 
 
 B. K, kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 14. 
 
 B. K. bishop to his knight's 2d. 
 W. Q. bishop to adverse K. bishop's 3d, 
 
 15. 
 
 B. K. knight to his square. 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 16. 
 
 B. The queen takes the bishop. 
 W. K. knight to adverse K. knight's 4th, 
 
 17, 
 
 B. K, knight to his rook's 3d. 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 18. 
 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 W. The queen to adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 19. 
 
 B. Q. knight to his king's 2d. 
 W. The queen to adverse queen's 3d. 
 
 20. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 21. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to his 3d square. 
 W. Q. rook to its queen's square. 
 
 v 3 2. B.
 
 294 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 22. 
 
 B. K. knight to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 W. The queen checks, at adverse queen's 2d. 
 
 23. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the queen. 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop checking. 
 
 24. 
 
 B. The king to his queen's square. 
 W. The knight gives check-mate 
 

 
 295 
 
 On the Extent in which the different Gambits are 
 models for Play. 
 
 BY THE EDITOR. 
 
 The term gambit, equivalent to a fall ly 
 tripping up, is well known to be derived from 
 the Italians, who borrowed it, as a trope, from 
 a phrase in wrestling. The title <c Damiano's 
 Gambit" is an anomaly in the application of it 
 at the present day; although from subsisting 
 relicks of obsolete usage, it may be collected 
 that the term originally comprehended any 
 course of enterprizing attack, by which the 
 assailed was suddenly circumvented. It is well 
 to restrict it to those games in which the jirst 
 player, at the second inoye, sacrifices the king's 
 bishop's pawn to the adverse king's, or the queen's 
 bishop's to the queen's; for a technical term is of 
 no use unless it makes the specification of prin- 
 ciples easy and intelligible. The King's and 
 Queen's Gambits are decidedly distinct in design, 
 find as a majority of writers maintain, in effect. 
 
 v 4 It
 
 296 niiLiDon's ANALYSIS. 
 
 It is agreed, that nothing is risked by the sa- 
 crifice of the pawn in the Queen's Gambit; 
 because the defensive player cannot support, 
 against a skilful antagonist, that which is 
 doubled on the queen's bishop's file, without 
 incurring defeat, but if he leave it undefend- 
 ed, satisfied to be equal, he may draw the game. 
 Nothing farther need be said of the Queen's 
 Gambit here. 
 
 Among the later masters of dies?, PHILI- 
 DOR stands almost alone, in thinking the King's 
 Gambit equally safe; and that the best defence 
 may draw the game, but cannot win: He makes 
 (be second player avoid, as a treacherous sur- 
 face, the speculation of sustaining permanently 
 the doubled, or gambit, pawn. 
 
 A host of opinions discountenance the attack 
 by the King's Gambit. LOLLI* states, that 
 it is not a secure enterprise ; because a pawn, 
 and the manoeuvre of castling are at stake: He 
 directs the second mover to guard tenaciously 
 the gambit pawn, as a preponderating acqui- 
 sition. And the ANONYMOUS MODENESE, in 
 a critique on PHJLIDOR'S First Gambit, main- 
 tains, on a principle distinct from LOLLI'S, 
 
 * Work before referred to, p. 217. 
 
 that
 
 KING'S GAMBIT. 
 
 that he who plays against the move ought to 
 \vin. The Editor has introduced both their 
 methods of defence at the places where they 
 deviate from PHILIDOR'S. Further, the Aca- 
 demy of Chess, which, about two centuries 
 ago, flourished at Naples, after a critical ana- 
 lysis of the King's Gambit, came to the con- 
 clusion, that he who plays it should lose. 
 
 After all, such infinite diversities of attack 
 and defence may spring from this opening of 
 the game, that the result which would neces- 
 sarily flow from the best chain of moves can- 
 not be strictly demonstrated. The Reader will 
 either try the question by experiment, or follow 
 that authority to which he attaches most weight. 
 An Academy, including ten or twelve players 
 of the first class, ought not to extinguish all 
 deference to the practical skill of PHILIDOR; 
 when the following facts are remembered. 
 This celebrated society, with the same eminent 
 members, could not ascertain, whether a Rook 
 acting with a Bishop against a remaining Rook, 
 were a decisive disparity. Carrera affirmed, 
 that the two pieces had the absolute power to 
 win ; while Salvio maintained, that the game 
 would be drawn, unless the antagonist com- 
 mitted an error. PHILIDOR has obviated all 
 doubt upon the point, by an ingenious demon- 
 stration ;
 
 298 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 stration ; which LOLU has incorporated into 
 his work with a liberal acknowledgment of 
 its merit. 
 
 With the additions introduced, our Author's 
 FIRST GAMBIT is now made to comprehend 
 the best standard of attack and defence, whe- 
 ther his own mode of defence, or that of the 
 Italian masters, shall prove superior. 
 
 The SECOND GAMBIT is to be studied for 
 the defence exclusively, as the first player has 
 an unfavourable game. 
 
 The least interesting of the varieties springing 
 from this opening, is the THIRD GAMBIT; be- 
 cause the defensive course is not eligible, unless 
 the party has received odds. 
 
 The peculiarity of the defence, the boldness of 
 the attack, the alternate sacrifices to gain a po- 
 sition, produce a striking vivacity in the FOURTH 
 or CUNNINGHAM GAMBIT; and it is calculated 
 to convey to the pupil an extensive knowledge of 
 the board. At the same time., the defence which 
 is most relied on may be precluded from trial 
 by a simple deviation at the pleasure of the 
 assailant, if he prefer a greater degree of se- 
 curity to a greater degree of brilliancy. 
 
 The SALVIO GAMBIT also turns on a radical 
 alteration in the defence. It surprizes by in- 
 genuity, in plan, and fertility of resource, Im-. 
 
 d$ , J * *. - V 
 
 mediately
 
 KING'S GAMBIT. 299 
 
 mediately contrived for transferring the attack 
 from the first to the second player, it will suc- 
 ceed, if the conduct of the early moves be not 
 fully understood by the antagonist. But this 
 method of defence yields to the practised as- 
 sailant, commencing on equal terras, a flight 
 
 J f 'A' 
 
 ascendancy of position. 
 
 . . : . 
 
 n 
 

 
 SCO PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 
 1. 
 
 W. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. bishop's 4th (a), 
 B. K. bishop to his knight's 2d (6). 
 
 (a) You might, instead, have pushed the king's rook's 
 pawn tzco squares, as in the first Back game. To this 
 Gambit, Philidorhas also a Supplement, vol. II. p. 127, in 
 which, at the fourth more, the K. r. pawn is played. Both 
 the Back-game and the Supplement shew, that the move is 
 inexpedient in that order. 
 
 (&) Instead of playing this bishop, he moves his king's 
 Icnigkfs paron in the second Back-game. It is very ma, 
 terial to compare the two methods of defence. 
 
 K W 
 
 1MU- '
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 301 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares (c). 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square (d). <=$ 
 
 6. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square (e). -4^} 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. -4^} 
 B. Q. b. pawa 1 square (/). 
 
 (c) This compels him to support his king's knight's 
 pawn with that of his rook ; by drawing out his rook's pawn, 
 you keep his king's knight confined, or unable to sally with- 
 out exposing his pawns. 
 
 (d) He has two other courses ; he might play his king's 
 bishop's pawn a square, in which case you sacrifice the 
 knight, in order to check with the queen, which ensures 
 you the game; or he might push his king's knight's pawn 
 upon your knight, as in the third Back-game. 
 
 (e) Had- he advanced his queen's bishop's pax n a squttre t 
 you had played that of your king, in readiness to take his 
 queen's pawn in passing, should he push it two moves with 
 a design to obstruct your king's bishop. The subject of 
 thd fourth Bark-game. 
 
 N. B. You will observe, that in the ATTACK BY GAMBIT 
 from tie KING'S side, the king's bishop is the material piece, 
 and the king's pawn the best pawn. 
 
 (/) If, instead, he play his queen's bishop either to 
 your king's knight's fourth, or to your kings third, he 
 loses as in the fifth and sixth Back-games. 
 
 8. W.
 
 302 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's. 4th (g).C# 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The K. kn. pawn 1 square (/j). 
 B. The K. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The K. r. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 ,. . ' li. 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 
 12. 
 
 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the K. kn. pawn. 
 B. K. bishop to his 3d square (z). 
 
 () lie may now safely play his bishop on this square, as 
 your queen can no more double with your king's bishop, 
 bearing on two of his pawns. In the Practical Commentary 
 (A), which is subjoined, the queen to the king's second. If 
 he had played this bishop to the king's third, he would have 
 lost, as in the seventh Back-game. 
 
 (h) It is material, in the attack of Gambits, not to spare 
 your pawns on the king's side, and even to sacrifice them 
 all, if requisite, though merely for the sake of the adversary's 
 king's pawn, because it hinders your queen's bishop from 
 c.T.-.ing into play, and cooperating with the pieces that be- 
 gin the attack. 
 
 (I) If he had taken your knight with his queen's bishop, 
 he would have lost the gain<\ 
 
 13. W.
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the bishop. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. -i oi!T ."'/ 
 B. The same. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The king castles. 
 B. The same. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The rook to his K. knight's square. 
 B. The queen to adverse K. bishop's 4th. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The queen to her K. knight's 2d. 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares*. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 19 
 
 TfT rr-V. 1*1 4V. 
 
 VV. The rook takes the queen. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 20. . 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the knight- 
 B. The Q. bishop takes the knight. 
 
 * The black might take the knight with his bishop, and, 
 after changing queens, play the K. knight on the adverse 
 
 nawn. EDITOR. 
 
 21. W. 
 
 .?.* oac a 
 
 pawn. EDITOR.
 
 30* 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The Q. knight takes the bishop. 
 B. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 22* ^ 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse K. bishop's d 
 B. The rook to K. bishop's square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The king to his queen's 2d (k} 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 20. 
 W. The bishop takes the rook (/). 
 
 - ~ " 
 
 () Had you pushed your queen's bishop's pawn, you 
 had lost the game ; because the adversary, by pushing his 
 queen's bishop's pawn, would have forced your queen's 
 pawn from its station, and have afterwards attacked 1 yotir 
 rook and bishop with his knight. 
 
 (/) From the manner in which the two positiofis, and the 
 remaining pieces or* balanced, it is evident that the game 
 must eventually be drawn, unless some error be committed* 
 This putty sfrprrs; thaT a Gambit, equally well affaclreTl ami 
 defended, will net be decisive j it is true that he who gives 
 the pawn has the pleasure of uniformly attacking, and a 
 prospect of winning, which would be realized, if he on the 
 defensive did not maintain the most undeviating good play 
 for the first ten or twelv moves. 
 
 PRACTICAL
 
 OfV* 
 FIRST GAMBIT, o\Jy 
 
 srf 1 ol Jrifirjf . >f . W 
 
 PRACTICAL COMMENTARY (A), 
 
 On the Eighth Move of the Black, p. 302. 
 
 .T;W' 
 8. 
 
 B. The queen to the king's 2d. 
 
 1 jidrnf^ oift. 
 
 The ANONYMOUS MODENESE would sub- 
 stitute this move, regarding that in the game as 
 faulty, because it permits the gambit-player 
 to equalize the pawns. He contends that this 
 is now prevented , for if the White push his K. 
 fcn. pawn a square, the Black, instead of taking 
 with the doubled pawn, can play the counter- 
 pawn upon the knight, and, on tbe knight's 
 removal, advance the gambit-pawn to adverse 
 bishop's third, preserving the superiority of a 
 pawn. If a different attack be tried, he adds, 
 that the Black can keep this advantage ; with 
 which, playing correctly, he must be the victor. 
 
 The Editor of PHI LI DOR admits, that the 
 substituted move provides against the ninth 
 move of the White, as it followed in the game. 
 If a corresponding change obviate the first 
 intention of the new defence, the direction of 
 both sides will require extreme caution. 
 
 VOL. i. x 9. W-
 
 306 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. K. knight to the rook's 3d. 
 
 The best counterstep appears to be : 
 B. Q. bishop to the king's 3d. 
 
 JO. 
 W. K. bishop retires to the queen's 3d. 
 
 The Editor leaves the propriety of playing 
 the gambit to the opinion of the reader.
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 307 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 On tlie Fourth Move of the White, p. 300. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. King's rook's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 5. 
 
 ' 
 
 W. K. knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 
 o o 
 
 B. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. K. rook to its 2d square, 
 
 7. 
 
 ^ o 
 
 W. Q. pawn squares. 
 
 T> ^ 1 
 
 B. Q. pawn I square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. knight to his queen's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 B. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 x2 11. W
 
 308 IMIILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The K. kn. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The K. kn. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 3d. 
 B. K. bishop to his rook's 3d. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. K. knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his queen's 2d. 
 B. The K. bishop takes the knight. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 B. The K. knight takes the K. pawn. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The knight or the bishop takes tbe knight. 
 B. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 This pawn will, in recovering a piece, join 
 the other pawns,, and attain a post, from which 
 
 it
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. -J^ 309 
 
 it will cost a piece to prevent his promotion, 
 as he will be assailable by ap adverse pawn : 
 farther, the blacks have a pawn more than the 
 whites. This example evinces, that to push 
 the rook's pawn, at the fourth move, is not 
 advisable. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 .0. 
 
 SECOND
 
 310 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the Black, p. 300. 
 
 4. 
 B. King's knight's pawn to adverse knight's 4th. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's square. 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q, pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. knight to his queen's 3d. 
 B. 1st pawn in K. b. file 1 square. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The queen gives check *. 
 
 * In Practical Commentary (B), on this more, the queen 
 to the king's second. 
 
 10. W.
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 311 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 3d (a). 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 
 II. 
 
 W. The king to his third square. 
 B. K. knight to his square (&). 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. K. bishop to his rook's 3d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his square, attacking the queen. 
 B. The queen takes the rook. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The K. bishop gives check, and the adverse 
 queen and a pawn are obtained for the 
 rook and bishop. 
 
 (a) GRECO plays the king to his square, -which seems to 
 be better, on account of the exchange of queens which the 
 Llack can now force. See the observation oa the eleventh 
 move. 
 
 (6) If the queen check at adverse king's second, and 
 force an exchange ; it will greatly protract the game, al- 
 though the whites must win. 
 
 ;)';) ,rt'i)> 
 
 PRACTICAL
 
 312 PIIILIPOR'S ANALYII3- 
 
 or 
 
 ' laod<i ' JJT! - 
 PRACTICAL COMMENTARY (B), 
 
 On */*e jYtnlA Mote of the Black, 
 
 IN THE SECOND BACK CAME. 
 
 9. 
 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 LOLLI*, in an independent game, directs 
 this move ; observing that the second player 
 may constantly maintain the advantage of a 
 pawn : but this cannot be received as demon- 
 strated, for the farther conduct of the party i 
 A difficult undertaking to which he has not 
 proceeded. 
 
 The previous train of play differs, at the fourth 
 move, from that on which the MODENESE 
 founds his defence. It will be proper to com- 
 pare the two ; and to examine, whether the 
 counterplay apparently preferred by LOLLI, be 
 equal or superior to that of his friend ; and 
 whether it be unquestionably safe, like the de- 
 fence of PHILIDOR. 
 
 In the present position, caution dictates a 
 specific step, although the Q. knight might be 
 moved. 
 
 * P. 220. 
 
 10. W.
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 313 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 B. K. bishop to the knight's 2d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. Q. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. knight to his K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. It is not easy to determine on the proper 
 move. 
 
 ,bfc a'ilooi till oi hhiiii'jJ ./ 
 Or, 
 
 12 
 
 W. Q. bishop to the queen's 3d. Were the same 
 bishop carried a square farther, the K. 
 knight would be excluded from a seat, which 
 a player who understands the two positions 
 will keep open. His queen must not take flit 
 exposed pawn. 
 
 ' " 5J 
 
 B. Q. bishop to the queen's 2d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The queen to her second square. 
 B. K. knight returns to its square. 
 
 14. 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 This method of defence seems something in- 
 ferior to that founded on the game. 
 
 THIRD
 
 314 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS, 
 
 .01 
 
 THIRD BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Fifth Move of the Blact, p. 301. 
 
 5. 
 
 B. King's knight's pawn 1 square. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K. knight to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the gambit pawn. 
 B. Q,. pawn 1 square. 
 
 . .WWW3iM'> "M\X' .? 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. K. knight returns to his square. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her kind's 2d. 
 
 -i o 
 
 12. W.
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 315 
 
 12. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. bishop's square. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The king castles with his rook. 
 B. Loses the game. 
 
 - 
 
 ' 
 
 : 
 . 
 
 n 
 r .H 
 
 .(' f 
 
 .., 
 
 FOURTH
 
 316 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 FOURTH BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Sixth Move of the Blacky p. 301. 
 
 6. 
 B. Queen's bishop's pawn 1 square. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q* knight to his queen's 2d. 
 $. Q* bishop to his rook's 3d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her knight's 3d, or any 
 where (a). 
 
 12. W. 
 
 (a) Or, if his queen remain, and his king's bishop return 
 to Li* square, h leaves a point unfortified. The knight's 
 
 pa\m
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 317 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The knight gives check, at the adverse 
 queen's 3d. 
 
 pawn will be lost without compensation, for the rook's 
 pawn must advance, on account of an ambuscade. There, 
 fore, though a greater loss be averted by moving the bishop, 
 the situation to which the critical move of this back-game 
 tends, is distressing. It does not involve an abrupt defeat; 
 but it brings an increasing inconvenience, from which defeat 
 will eventually flow. EDITOR. 
 
 FIFTH
 
 318 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 FIFTH BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Seventh Move of the Black, p. 301. 
 
 7. 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. bishop to his K. rook's 4th *. 
 
 9. 
 
 \V. The K. r. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The rook takes the bishop. 
 B. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 U. 
 
 W The K. bishop takes the pawn, giving a 
 divergent check to the king ai.d rook ; 
 wins a piece, and consequently the game. 
 
 * This seems loosely played. Would it not be belter, at 
 this place, for the queen's bishop's to capture the knight ? 
 
 SIXTH
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 319 
 
 SIXTH BACK GAME, 
 
 THE SECOND 
 On the Seventh Move of the Black, p. 301. 
 
 7. 
 B. Queen's bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 B. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 J5. The queen to her bishop's square, to defend 
 the two pawns. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 II. 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The bishop takes the rook. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The K. knight takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to. his 3d square. 
 
 13. W.
 
 PH1LIDOR 8 ANALYSIS, 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d (a). 
 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 B. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The king castles. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 16. 
 
 . 
 
 W. The rook to its K. rook's square (&}. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The rook takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the rook. 
 
 18. 
 W. The queen takes the K. pawn and gives 
 
 check. 
 
 B. The king retires where he pleases, the game 
 is lost. 
 
 (a) If be play the king's bishop to his 3d, to take away 
 jouc knight, he will force you to deviate from the design 
 executed in the following moves j but you must win, though 
 less rapidly. 
 
 (6) The object of this attack is to draw the black queen, 
 fcy an exchange, from the square where she supports the 
 Sing's pawn. 
 
 SEVENTH
 
 8. 
 
 FIRST GAMBIT. 
 
 SEVENTH BACK GAME, 
 
 on 1 .fl 
 
 On the Eighth Move of the Black. 
 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 9 * L' iiwrf .nJ .9 .VA 
 W. The bishop takes the bishop*. 
 
 B. Th pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 10. 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. < 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2cL 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The same. 
 
 13. 
 
 "W. The knight's pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 * This course of attack may be defeated, at the 16th 
 move. The bishop therefore, instead of taking, should re. 
 tire to the queen's third ; and the position will coincide with 
 that, inverting the 8th and 9th moves, in Practical Com- 
 mentary (A), p. 305. EDITOR. 
 
 VOL, i. r 14. W.
 
 FHIUDOK'S ANALYSIS, 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The queeu takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square*. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. Q. knight to his 3d square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The bishop to his king's 3d; 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 3d. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 2d. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. bishop returns to his square. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 * To, destroy the position which the White has obtained 
 by a sacrifice, the Black should sacrifice the qneen's knight 
 for the two pawns la K. and K. b. files. EDITOR. 
 
 22. W.
 
 FIR1T GAMBIT. 323 
 
 22. 
 
 \V. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The knight gives check. 
 B. The king retires. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its knight's square. 
 B. The Q. knight takes first pawn in Q,. b, file. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The knight takes the Q. kn. pawn. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king to his Q. rook's square. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's square. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. K. rook to its 2d square. 
 B. Q. roek to its queen's 2d. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. K. rook to its Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. K. rook to its 2d square. 
 
 SO. 
 W. The queen takes the Q. b. pawn, and wins. 
 
 2
 
 324 
 
 ex? 
 
 Gambit* 
 
 r 
 
 .39n& *oyr, j;i 
 W. King's pawn 2 squares. * 
 
 B. The same. 
 
 2 
 
 .O'i 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 r.T 'i if O "5 ? r jffi"t 'T 
 
 W. K. bishop to Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 B. The queen gives check (a). 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's square. 
 B. K. kn'. pawn 2 squares (6). 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her K. rook's 4th (c). 
 
 6. W. 
 
 (a) The better course is to advance the king's bishop's 
 pawn two squares; as in the First Back game. See also the 
 Fourth Back Game, varied at the 19th move. 
 
 (6) There are two other ways of playing; the one, 
 seating the king's bishop at the queen's bishop's fourth; 
 the other, pushing the queen's pawn a square; respec- 
 tively tried in. the Second and Third Back games. 
 
 (c) This is the best of the three squares open to his 
 
 queen.
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. HT 325 
 
 6. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 B. Q. pawn 1 square. > 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square (d). 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th, 
 
 a 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. . 
 B, Q. knight to his queen's 2d (e). <$ 
 
 10. W. 
 
 queen. Had he played her to your king's knight's fourth, 
 you might have taken his king's bishop's pawn, giving 
 check, and whether he should take or refuse the bishop, 
 by attacking, have forced his queen. If he had carried 
 her to his king's rook's third, you had attacked his king's 
 bishop's pawn with your king's knight, which had decided 
 the game in your favour. 
 
 ((/) It is essential in the king's gambit to play this pawn, 
 that you may afterwards be able to place your queen at 
 her knight's third ; by so doing you strengthen your position, 
 and perplex the adversary, especially if he has played his 
 queen's bishop, without attacking one of your pieces. See, 
 respecting this, the Fifth and Sixth Back games of the First 
 Gambit. 
 
 (e) His bishop taket your K. knight, in the Fourth 
 y 3 Back-
 
 PHILIDOR'8 ANALYST?, 
 
 10. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the queen (/). $ 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The king takes the queen (g). 
 B. The pawn gives check. 
 
 IS. 
 
 W. The king takes the other pawn. 
 B. The K. bishop gives check, at his rook's 3d. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The king to adverse K. bishop's 4th (A). 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 15. W. 
 
 > |-jj ; -H 
 
 Back-game ; and, in consequence of a move which escaped 
 Philidor. if would appear, must win. 
 
 (f) Instead of taking your queen, he gives check, in 
 the Fifth Back Game, and loses. 
 
 (^) I have given it, as a general rule, ALWAYS TO UNITE 
 
 TOUR PAWNS, AND BUJNG THEM INTO THE CENTRE. Here >, 
 
 hozeever, an exception: for two reasons; if you take 
 with the king, you gain a pawn ; secondly, the queens 
 having been exchanged, your king has nothing to fear, 
 and by bringing him into play, he may be as useful as any 
 other piece. 
 
 (ft) Your king wtmld not be safe on that square, if the 
 
 adversary
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 32? 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The rook takes the bishop. 
 B. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The knight to his queen's 2d. * .Yi 
 
 B. The king to his second square. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K. rook to its K. bishop's square (i*);' .7 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square (k). 
 
 18. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its king's square. 
 B. Q. ku. pawn 2 squares (/). 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The bishop to the Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 adversary had a bishop running white to assail htm; but, as 
 it is, your king sustains all your pawns. 
 
 (i) You might have played this rook to yonr king'f 
 square ; but your queen's rook would have !>eeu rendered 
 almost useless ; it is better, therefore, to postpone the attack, 
 and prepare all your pieces for action. 
 
 (A) He prepares to push his queen's pawn a square, to 
 break your centre: you must prevent it, by compelling 
 him to defend himself. 
 
 (/) By an attack on your left, he endeavours to mak 
 an opening for his rooks. 
 
 Y 4 20. W.
 
 328 rillLIDOR's ANALYSIS. 
 
 . &, . ' 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. K. knight to his queen's 4th. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 4th (m); 
 B. Q. knight to his 3d square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The knight to adverse K. bishop's 3d, 
 B. Q. rook to its queen's square (nj. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. K. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. rook to its queen's 3d (0). 
 
 (m) You had played wrong had you taken his knight 
 with your bishop; because his pawn, after taking your 
 bishop, would obstruct the passage of your knight : it was 
 necessary to play this knight first, in order to have no 
 useless piece. 
 
 () Had he taken your knight, you must have taken his, 
 with the pawn, and afterwards attacked his king's bishop's 
 pawn, with your queen's rook at adverse king's second. 
 
 (o) If, instead, he had taken your pawn, you would have 
 won the game in a few moves, because he would have lost 
 his queen's bishop's pawn. Had he taken your knight with 
 his, you had taken his pawn, giving check by discovery. 
 
 25. W,
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 329 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn, discovering check. 
 B. The kinff takes the pawn. 
 
 f 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The king to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 B. The king to his knight's 2d. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The knight takes the r. pawn, checking. 
 B. The kins* to his rook's 2d. 
 
 28. 
 W. The K. rook gives check. 
 
 T. TO. 1 1 , : '* W 
 
 is. Ine king to his knight's square. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. Q. rook to its queen's square (p). 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the queen's knight, and 
 wins. 
 
 (p) Were he to play his king, instead of his queen's 
 rook, you give check with your queen's rook, and take 
 that of his king. It is to be remarked, that what has de- 
 cided the game in favour of the white, is, that the king, 
 having been in a situation, to enter the field with safety, 
 which rarely happens, has been as instrumental to victory, 
 as th best of his pieces. CHARLES XII. of Sweden was ob- 
 served,
 
 330 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 erred, very characteristically, to more the king more than 
 any other piece ; but this conduct is seldom to be imitated, 
 on account of the ruin which involves the whole community 
 of pieces, if the king meet with a disaster. 
 
 VARIATION. 
 
 At the 28th move, let the bishop check, in- 
 itead of the rook ; and the mate will be effected 
 in three moves. 
 
 
 FIRST
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 331 
 
 <iii v i. 3 m ,tlum siiit .tar, 
 
 . 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 <i!> ^m-jii 
 On the Third Move of the Elack. 
 
 MJ<VJ<| Of?y7';,oi3z3 , bs ni brvJrrnr 
 3. -^u.'U? 
 
 B. King's bishop's pawn 2 squares. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn (a). 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's square. 
 B. K. pawn to adverse K. bishop's 3d (&}>.( 
 (Jdr o. ; ns, liiui lor 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The K. pawn takes the pawn, checking (c). 
 
 7. 
 
 W. The king takes the pawn. 
 B. The K. rook takes the bishop, and wins. 
 
 (a) I make the white pawn take that pawn, to shew that 
 it must cause the loss of the game ; the best move in thi 
 puzzling situation, were your queen to the king's second. 
 
 (b) He exposes your king's bishop to be taken by hi 
 queen. 
 
 (c) So situated, he cannot well shape his play so as not 
 to win. 
 
 From
 
 3S2 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 From this result, in connection with remarks 
 on the Fourth Back-game, it may be affirmed, 
 that when the snares of this gambit are spread 
 against Experience, the assailant runs a con- 
 siderable risk. He must delight to be com- 
 mitted in adventure, who proposes, by capti- 
 vating invitations that may be declined so ad- 
 vantageously, to circumvent a good player ; 
 and yet the mechanism, springing at the 3d 
 move, however it may fail against complete 
 Insight into the manoeuvres of Chess, is stamp- 
 ed with traces of a penetrating calculation, and 
 a fine conception. It is a discouragement from 
 adopting this refined speculation, that the player 
 cannot retire to even ground, if ably opposed ; 
 but must leave the adversary some slight supe- 
 riority of circumstances, and meet his strokes 
 in a defensive attitude. 
 
 SECOND
 
 SECOND GAMBIT: 333 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the Black. 
 
 4. 
 
 B. King's bishop to his Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B, K. bishop to bis Q. knight's 3d. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 7. 
 W. The K. bishop takes the K. b. pawn, and 
 
 gives check. 
 
 B. The king to his bishop's square, because if 
 he takes the bishop he loses his queen (a). 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The queen to adverse K. knight's 3d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 (a) By the check of the knight. 
 
 JO. W.
 
 334 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his king's 2d. 
 
 B. The queen to her K. knight's 3d. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The K. knight gives check to the king and 
 queen, and wins the game. 
 
 The white player's sacrifice of his bishop, 
 for the attainment of more than a compensation, 
 certain but distant, is a pleasing specimen of 
 invention and address. 
 
 ,213\ 
 .(? 
 
 ." 
 
 THIRD
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 335 
 
 .11 
 
 THIRD BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the Black. 
 
 f***J#**^%T -W- 
 B. Queen's pawn 1 square. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her K. rook's 4th (a). 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. r. pawn I square. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B, The queen to her K. knight's 3d. 
 
 (a) Should he take your K. knight, instead of withdrawing 
 his queen, take his bishop with your queen ; and afterwards 
 push the K. kn. pawn a square 
 
 11. W.
 
 336 PIIILIDOR'S ANALYSIS 
 
 11. 
 
 W. The rook's pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 2d. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 13. 
 W. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 B. The queen to her square. 
 
 ,, 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. knight to his 3d. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her 2d square. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 1 
 
 B. The king to the Q. knight's square. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's square. 
 
 10 
 
 ,._ ,_. _..... _ .. J /. 
 
 W. Q. kn k pawn 2 squares, uy^a^i 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 SO. W.
 
 337 
 
 20. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 21. 
 W. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 99 
 
 ISmff 
 
 W. The queen to her knight's 3d. 
 B. K. knight t6 his bishop's 3d. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The K. bishop takes the doubled pawn. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 2d. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 B. K. bishop to his knight's 2$. 
 
 25 % 
 
 W. K. bishop to adverse Q. bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The knight to his queen's 3d. 
 B. K. knight to his king's 4th. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The knight takes tfye knight, 
 B. The bishop takes, the knight. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 1 squaw. 
 B. The bishop to his K^ knight's Z$ 
 
 39. W.
 
 338 PHILltfOR's ANALYSIS. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his queen's 4th. 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. Q. rook to its K. knight's square. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its Q. bishop's square. 
 B. Q. rook to its K. knight's 3d. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 B. K. rook to its knight's square. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight, checking. 
 B. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the rook. 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 36. 
 
 W. The rook gives check. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's square. 
 
 37. 
 
 W. The queen to her bishop's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her 2d square. 
 
 38. W.
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 339 
 
 38. 
 W. The K. b, pawn 1 square, to prevent the 
 
 queen's check. 
 B. The rook to its K. knight's square. 
 
 39. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse Q. bishop's 3d (.a). 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 40. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. 
 B. The king to his Q. bishop's 2d. 
 
 41. 
 
 W. The Q. pawn moves. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 42. 
 
 W. The rook to its K. rook's square. 
 B. The same. 
 
 43. 
 
 W. The rook to its K. knight's square. 
 B. The rook to its second square. 
 
 44. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse K. knight's square, 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 (a) This offer is tactical, because one of the white pawns is 
 doubled, and they -will extend on the four centre files, if the 
 black queen accept the exchange. 
 
 z 2 45. W. 

 
 340 FHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 45. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse Q. rook's square. 
 B. The king to the Q. knight's 3d. 
 
 46. 
 
 W. The rook gives check. 
 B. The king to the Q. bishop's 2<L 
 
 47. 
 
 W. The rook gives check. 
 B. The king to the queen's square. 
 
 48. 
 
 W. The K. pawn moves. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 49. 
 
 \V. The Q. pawn to adverse queen's 3cL 
 B. The king to the Q. bishop's square. 
 
 50. 
 
 "W. The Q. pawn gives check. 
 B. The king to his queen's square. 
 
 51. 
 
 W. The rook gives check, the king remove*; 
 the pawn is queened, and wins* 
 
 FOURTH
 
 SECOND G 
 
 AMBIT. 341 
 
 FOURTH BACK GAME, 
 
 Gn the Ninth Move of the Black, p. 325. 
 
 "* 
 8. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. 
 B. K. bishop to his knight's 2d. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. K. rook to its knight's square. 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 2d, 
 
 14. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the gambit pawn. 
 B. The K. bishop takes the Q. pawn, checking. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse K. knight's 2d. 
 $, Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 z3 17. W.
 
 342 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The Q. knight takes the pawn. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn, and gives check. 
 B. The king to his bishop's square. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its K. knight's square. 
 B. Q. knight returns to his bishop's 3d *. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The bishop to his Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. Q. rook to its queen's square. 
 
 2]. 
 W. The K. rook gives check, at the adverse K. 
 
 bishop's 2d. . 
 B. The king to his square. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. Q. rook to adverse K. knight's 2d. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The knight to adverse queen's 4th the 
 whites win. 
 
 * It is intended to offer a variation on this move. 
 
 VARIATION
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 
 
 VARIATION BY THE EDITOR, 
 
 On the Nineteenth Move of the Black. 
 POSITION OF THE PIECES. 
 
 3130. 1. 
 
 19, 
 B. K. knight to his 4th (a), 
 
 20. W. 
 
 (a) The doubling of your two rooks creates his whole 
 
 embarrassment; he places his knight here to destroy their 
 
 1 4 communication.
 
 344 
 
 20. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse knight's square (6). 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The K. rook takes the Q. rook. 
 B. The rddk takes the rdok. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 fe. The pawn $&$& the pa^n. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook to the K. Vctok's square. Has far 
 the better game. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 B. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 communication, and whether you take or refuse his knight, 
 that interruption to their action on which his defence depends 
 will be obtained. 
 
 (6) In a sub-variation on the WHITE play, No. 2, the 
 bishop to adverse K. rook's 4th, In No. 3, the pawn 
 takes the knight.
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn, checking. 
 B. The king to his rook's 3d. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse queen's 4th. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The rook takes the knight. 
 B. The king takes the bishop. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The rbok takes the pawn. 
 B. The king to his knight's 4th. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The knight to the king's 2d. 
 B. The K. rook checks. 
 
 27. 
 
 W- The king to his square. 
 B. The Q. rook to K. rook's square. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The rook to adverse queen's 2d. 
 B. Q. rook to adverse K. rook's 3d. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The Q. rook takes the pawn. 
 
 30. 
 
 W. The knight to his queen's 4th. 
 B. Q. rook to adverse K. knight's 3d. 
 
 31. W
 
 346 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 31. 
 
 W. The rook gives check, at adverse K. knight'i 
 
 2d. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 32. 
 
 W. The rook takes the rook. 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 33. 
 
 W. The pawn gives check. 
 B. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 34. 
 
 W. The knight to his K. bishop's 3d. 
 B. The rook gives check. 
 
 35. 
 
 W. The king to his 2d square. 
 B. The pawn in K. kn. file 1 square. 
 
 36, 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 B. The pawn queens. 
 
 37. 
 
 W. The knight takes the queen. 
 B. The rook gives check. 
 
 38. 
 
 W. The king to his 3d square. 
 B. The rook takes the pawn ; and will win easily 
 
 Or,
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 34? 
 
 Or, tf ' 
 
 J130. 3. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. Pawn in K. kn. file 1 square. 
 B. Q. b.'pawn 1 square. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The rook to K. knight's 4th. 
 B. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The rook to its K. rook's 4th. 
 B. K. rook to its 3d square. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 2d. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The king takes the knight. 
 B. Q. rook to its K. bishop's square. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The rook takes the gambit pawn. 
 B. The K. rook takes the pawn. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the rook. 
 B. The rook takes the rook. 
 
 28. W.
 
 PHILIDOfc'g ANALYSIS. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the pawn. 
 B. The rook to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 
 29. 
 
 W. The bishop to his K. knight's 4th; must 
 evidently lose, 
 
 Here is another occasion for observing, that 
 when a move at tiie beginning of a back game is 
 pointed out, as necessarily leading to defeat, the 
 subsequent moves of thfe losing party should be 
 undeviatingly correct, or the commission of a 
 fundamental error cannot be considered as 
 proved. In the present case, the proscribed 
 move appears to produce neither a near nor a 
 remote disadvantage ; provided the resource be 
 used, which in the back game was overlooked. 
 This, the EDITOR deemed it proper to state 
 distinctly ; lest players, conforming upon trust, 
 to the explicit directions of PHILIDOR, respect- 
 ing the ninth move, should be deceived. The 
 general foundation of the SECOND GAMBIT is 
 affected by this turn { as it seems the black 
 queen may, contrary to all our master's ex- 
 amples, at the third move, give check, without 
 losing the game : on the contrary, the second 
 player may, after this step, acquire the best; 
 position. 
 
 FIFTH
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 349 
 
 FIFTH BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Eleventh Move of the Slack. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The knight checks, at adverse K. knight'* 
 
 4th. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The king to his knight's square. 
 B. The K. kn. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the pawn. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 ijh 
 
 W. The knight to his Q. rook's 3d. 
 B. The queen takes the queen. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the queen. 
 B. K. knight to his rook's 4th. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The K. rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The K. knight takes the bishop. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The rqok takes the knight. 
 B. &. fc. pawn Jl square
 
 350 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The bishop to adverse king's 3d. 
 B. The bishop to his king's 2d. 
 
 20. 
 
 "W. Q. rook to its K. rook's square. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's square. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight. 
 B. The rook takes the bishop. 
 
 99 
 
 &&. 
 
 W. Q. rook to adverse K. rook's 3d. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse K. bishop's 4th. 
 B. The bishop to his queen's square. 
 
 9A. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The king to his Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. Pawn in K. b. file 1 square. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. Pawn in K. b. file to adverse bishop's 4th. 
 As the adversary cannot attack your 
 
 pieces,
 
 , .. ... 
 
 SECOND GAMBIT. 351 
 
 pieces, you have simply to transport the 
 knight, by five successive steps, to the 
 adverse K. knight's third. By dislodging 
 his rook, you can take the rook's pawn, 
 and consequently win. 
 
 i .> A 
 

 
 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS 
 
 bii; 
 
 1. 
 
 W. The king's pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The same. 
 
 2. 
 
 W. K. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. pawn 2 squares (a). -4^} 
 
 3. 
 
 W. The K. pawn 'takes the pawn, 
 B. The queen takes the pawn (6). <=$ 
 
 W. The K. b. pawn takes the pawn *. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn, and gives 
 check. 
 
 5.W. 
 
 (a) This move may be played, in order to avoid the 
 snares of your adversary in the Gambit, when you receive 
 the advantage of a piece, but not otherwise. Had he pushed 
 this pawn but one square, it had entirely changed th 
 game ; therefore, I make it the subject of a back.game. 
 
 (>) In the Second Back.game, he takes your king'* 
 bishop'' s pawn with his king's pawn ; a fundamental change. 
 
 * In a subjoined Variation after G&ECO, Q. knight ta 
 
 th<
 
 THIRD GAMBIT. 353 
 
 5. 
 
 W. The K. bishop interposes (c). 
 B. K. bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The king castles. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 the bishop's third; which, as it is generally modelled in 
 treatises, has a brilliant effect: but this attack is certainly 
 not superior to PHILIDOR'S. When justice is done to the 
 play of the black, perhaps it is not so safe. 
 
 (c) Loosely weighed, the game may appear equal : but 
 there is a small advantage in having on your left wing four 
 connected pawns, whilst the adverse pawns are in divisions 
 of three and three, and separated from the centre. 
 
 VOL. I. A A 11. W.
 
 PHIUDOR S ANALYSIS. 
 11. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his queen's 3d*. 
 B. The king castles with his rook (d). 
 
 12. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th (e). 
 B. K. r. pawn I square. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his K. rook's 4th. 
 B. The queen to her square. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his king's 4tli (/). 
 B. K. bishop to his king's 2d. 
 
 .-"/,..; ; -. 
 
 * The queen might with propriety be played to her 
 knight's third. 
 
 (d) It was apparently indifferent on which wing he 
 castled. When he takes refuge on a different' side from 
 you, I have given a general rule for impelling your pawns 
 against his covering pawns. For illustration, in the third 
 back game, he castles on the queen's side, 
 
 {e} This would have been wrong had he not castled on 
 this side, because, by pushing his king's rook's pawn, he had 
 forced the bishop to retire; but now you excite him to push 
 
 the pawns that cover his king, to prepare a breach for the 
 
 " ' r r 
 
 attack. 
 
 (/) If he had not removed his queen, to replace her 
 with the king's bishop, the play of this knight would have 
 
 o f r j a 
 
 perplexed his game. 
 
 1 5. W.
 
 THIRD GAMBIT. 355 
 
 15. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 2d (g). 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The knight takes the knight. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The bishop takes the knight 
 B. The bishop takes the bishop. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 4th. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 ;B. The bishop takes the knight (h). 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. rook to its queen's square (?'). 
 
 
 >d th icrru/.') ;jo-< ,;\ni* 
 
 (g) If, instead, he had taken your Q. knight, you must 
 have taken his knight with your queen Compelling him to 
 derange his position to prevent tke threatened mate. 
 
 (h) Had he withdrawn his bishop, you had taken the 
 king's knight's pawn with the knight, and that would have 
 given you the game. 
 
 (t) If he had attacked your queen with hi* bishop, you 
 would have taken his bishop with your king's rook; this, 
 by making an opening upon his king, would give you an 
 .easier attack, 
 
 IHAY A A3 21. W.
 
 356 PHJLIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. K. rook to adverse K. bishop's 3d. 
 
 B. The queen to her second square (k}. 
 
 QQ 
 
 <z&. 
 
 W. The K. rook takes the K. kn. pawn, checking. 
 B. The pawn takes the rook. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn, checking. 
 B. The king to his rook's square (/). 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The queen takes the pawn, and gives a 
 perpetual check. 
 
 (&) Had he not removed her, you had won by taking his 
 bishop with your rook. 
 
 (I) Had he interposed his queen, you had taken his 
 bishop, checking ; and would have been left with two 
 pawns and a bishop for the rook, and in possession of the 
 attack, which, improved, would be sufficient to win : but, 
 as he has played his king, you cannot do better than draw 
 the game with perpetual check, 
 
 S, VARIATION
 
 THIRD GAMBIT. 357 
 
 VARIATION 
 
 On the Fourth Move of the Wliite. 
 
 POUNDED ON AN EXTRACT FROM THE SECOND 
 BOOK OF GRECO. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. Queen's knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her king's 3d. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. K. knight to the bishop's 3d. 
 B. The K. pawn takes the pawn, discovering 
 check. 
 
 6. 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 
 [ GRECO here checks with the K. bishop, which 
 is compelled by the 2. pawn to retire. Then 
 the white bishop gives check ; and, whether 
 the adverse, king removes or is covered, the 
 white K. rook is carried, next move, to the 
 king's square, which decides the game.~\ 
 B. K. bishop to the king's 2d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 A A3 
 
 7. 
 
 e. 
 A A3 8. W.
 
 358 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the gambit pawn. 
 B. K. knight to the king's 3d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. K. bishop to the queen's 3d. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square, 

 
 THIRD GAMBIT. 359 
 
 FIRST BACK GAME, 
 
 . 
 
 On the Second Move of the Black. 
 
 2. 
 B. Queen's pawn 1 square. 
 
 3. 
 
 W. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 4. 
 
 W. K bishop to the Q. bishop's 4th. 
 B. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d, 
 
 5. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The queen takes the bishop. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. knight to his rook's 4th. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. K. bishop checks, at adverse knight's 4th. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 A A 4 9. W.
 
 360 PUILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The bishop to his Q. rook's 4th. 
 B. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 
 JQ. 
 
 W. The bishop to his Q. bishop's 2d. 
 B. K. bishop to his king's 2cL 
 
 11. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 B. The K. pawn takes, the Q. pawn. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 13. 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 B. Q. knight to the adverse Q. bishop's 4th. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 B. The Q. knight takes the pawn* 
 
 15. 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The Q. knight returns to adverse bishop's 4th, 
 
 16. 
 
 W. The knight takes the knight. 
 B. The pawn takes the knight. 
 
 17. 
 
 "W. The K. kn. pawn advances. 
 EL The knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 18. MT.
 
 THIRD GAMBIT. 361 
 
 18. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The king to his queen's square. 
 B. The queen to adverse Q. rook's 3d. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its bishop's square. 
 B. The queen takes the Q. r. pawn. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. Q. rook to its knight's square, 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The K. pawn removes. 
 B. K. kn. pawn 1 square. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 B. Q. rook to adverse Q. knight's 2d. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. K. r. pawn to adverse rook's 4th. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. The K. r. pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The K. b. pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. The K, rook takes the pawn. 
 B. The king takes the rook. 
 
 27. W.
 
 362 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The queen checks, at the ad verse rook's 4th. 
 B. The king to either square. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The queen taking the pawn, gives check- 
 and mates the following move. 
 
 
 i 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 SECOND
 
 
 THIRD GAMBIT, 363 
 
 SECOND BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Third Move of the Black. 
 
 3. 
 B. The king's pawn takes the pawn. 
 
 4. 
 
 ; K. knight to his bishop' s 3d. 
 B. The queen takes the pawn. 
 
 5. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The queen gives check, at adverse king's 4th 
 
 6. 
 
 W. The king to his bishop's 2d. 
 B. K. bishop to his king's 2d. 
 
 7. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her bishop's 3d. 
 
 8. 
 
 W. The Q. bishop takes the pawn. 
 B. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 
 9. 
 
 W. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 B. The queen to her 3d- square. 
 
 10. 
 
 W. Q. b. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 11. W.
 
 364 PHILIDOR'S ANALYSIS. 
 
 11. 
 
 W. Q. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 B. K. knight to his bishop's 3d. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. rook's pawn 1 square. 
 B. The king castles. 
 
 13. >a 
 
 W. K. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. K. bishop to his queen's 3d. 
 
 14. 
 
 W. K. knight to adverse king's 4th. 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 15 
 
 ri -:-, :- JJ - 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. K. knight to his king's square. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its queen's square. 
 B. The queen to her king's 2d. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. K. knight's pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 18. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse K. rook's 4th. 
 B. K. kn, pawn 1 square. 
 
 19. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse K, rook's 3d. 
 B. The queen gives check. 
 
 30. W.
 
 THIRD CfAMBIT. 365 
 
 20. 
 
 W. The king to his knight's 3d. 
 
 B. The Q. knight takes the pawn in K. file. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. The knight to his king's 4th. 
 B. The queen to adverse queen's 4th. 
 
 22. 
 W. The knight gives check, at adverse K. 
 
 bishop's 3d. 
 B. The knight takes the knight. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the knight. 
 B. The game is lost, the mate being forced*. 
 
 * A forced-mate is a mate, which, though a few despe- 
 rate sacrifices might protract it ? is inevitable. 
 
 or, 
 
 THIRD
 
 
 36*6 FHILIDOR'* ANALYSIS, 
 
 THIRD BACK GAME, 
 
 On the Eleventh Move of the Black. 
 
 11. 
 
 B. The king castles on his queen's side. 
 
 12. 
 
 W. K. rook to its king's square. 
 B. The queen retires to K. bishop's square, 
 
 13. 
 
 W. The queen to her rook's 4th. 
 B. The king to the Q. knight's square. 
 
 I*- 
 
 W. Q. bishop to his king's 3d. 
 B. Q. b. pawn 1 square. 
 
 15. 
 
 W. Q. pawn 1 square. 
 B. Q. bishop to adverse K. knight's 4th. 
 
 16. 
 
 W. Q. kn. pawn 2 squares. 
 B. The bishop takes the knight. 
 
 17. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the bishop. 
 B. Q. rook to its bishop's square. 
 
 18. 
 W. The knight to adverse Q. knight's 4tb. 
 
 B. Q. r. pawn 1 square. 
 
 19. W.
 
 THIRD GAMBIT. 367 
 
 19- 
 
 W. The knight takes the bishop. 
 B. The queen takes the knight. 
 
 20. 
 
 W. Q. rook to its knight's square. 
 B. Q. knight to his king's 4th. 
 
 21. 
 
 W. K. bishop to his king's 2d. 
 B. K. knight to his queen's 2d. 
 
 22. 
 
 W. The queen to adverse Q. rook's 4th. 
 B. The queen checks, at her K. knight's 3d. 
 
 23. 
 
 W. The king to his rook's square. 
 B. The queen returns to her 3d square. 
 
 24. 
 
 W. The pawn takes the pawn. 
 B. The knight takes the pawn. 
 
 25. 
 
 W. Q. rook to adverse Q. knight's 3d. 
 B. The queen to her K. bishop's square. 
 
 26. 
 
 W. K. rook to its Q. knight's square. 
 B. K. knight (at his king's 4th) to Q.'s 2d. 
 
 27. 
 
 W. The Q. rook takes the rook's pawn. 
 B. The knight takes the rook. 
 
 28. W.
 
 368 PHlLlDOn's ANALYSIS. 
 
 28. 
 
 W. The queen takes the knight. 
 B. Q. rook to its bishop's 2d. 
 
 29- 
 W. The Q. pawn one square, and wins. 
 
 END OP VOL, I. 
 
 R.,Watt, Printer, Broxbourne.
 
 
 HQl/,1 1 1983 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 4 
 
 '4W 
 
 191 
 
 24139
 
 . P537S 
 
 A 000 978 003 " 3 11 58 00433 C